IntroductionWelcome| 00:00 |
(MUSIC).
| | 00:04 |
Hello, my name is Gabriel Powell, and I'm
going to be your host in this video
| | 00:07 |
training workshop.
As an Adobe Certified Instructor and a
| | 00:11 |
passionate user of InDesign, it's my
pleasure to introduce you to the world of eBooks.
| | 00:17 |
And teach you how to create an eBook that
can be read on a computer, a smartphone
| | 00:20 |
or a dedicated eBook reader such as the
Apple iPad or even a Sony Reader.
| | 00:27 |
I'll first show you what an eBook is and
give you an overview of the entire eBook
| | 00:31 |
production process.
I'll walk you through each step of the
| | 00:36 |
way from properly setting up an InDesign
document, to exporting the EPUB file.
| | 00:43 |
You'll also learn how to crack open an
eBook and make even further adjustments
| | 00:46 |
to it as needed.
Each chapter in this series is designed
| | 00:50 |
to take you through the process from
start to finish.
| | 00:54 |
So, I recommend that you watch each video
once all the way through, and then go
| | 00:57 |
back and watch specific videos when you
need a review.
| | 01:03 |
You can use the project files included
with this video to practice everything
| | 01:06 |
your learning.
So, lets get started and let me show you
| | 01:09 |
just how fun and creative it is to create
eBooks with InDesign.
| | 01:13 |
| | Collapse this transcript |
|
|
1. Getting StartedWhat is an ebook?| 00:02 |
In this lesson I'm going to introduce you
to the exciting world of eBooks.
| | 00:06 |
Not too long ago the notion of
downloading a paperless book from a
| | 00:10 |
website and reading it on a small hand
held device was just a dream.
| | 00:15 |
But now that thousands of eBooks are
being downloaded every day, what once was
| | 00:19 |
a dream is now a reality.
In fact, the publishing industry has
| | 00:24 |
experienced such a dramatic change as a
result of the exploding eBook market,
| | 00:27 |
that you could easily say that we are at
the beginning of a publishing revolution.
| | 00:34 |
So what exactly is an eBook?
The term eBook is short for electronic book.
| | 00:40 |
It's the digital equivalent of a
traditional printed book.
| | 00:44 |
Now when I say eBook, I'm not actually
referring to a PDF file.
| | 00:48 |
The standard PDF format is certainly
widely used for eBooks, but within the
| | 00:53 |
past couple of years, a new and widely
accepted eBook format has emerged, called EPUB.
| | 00:59 |
EPUB stands for electronic publication.
The EPUB format is a free, open eBook
| | 01:04 |
standard that was developed by the
International Digital Publishing Forum,
| | 01:09 |
which is the trade and standards
association for the digital publishing industry.
| | 01:16 |
For more information about them, check
out their website at idpf.org.
| | 01:22 |
There are several other eBook formats in
use today as well such as the AZW or MOBI
| | 01:26 |
formats, which can be read on an Amazon
Kindle.
| | 01:31 |
The Mobipocket format is based on the
open eBook standard, which is actually
| | 01:35 |
the same standard that the EPUB format is
based on.
| | 01:40 |
It's even possible to convert an EPUB
file to a MOBI file, so that the same
| | 01:43 |
eBook can be read on the Kindle.
So I actually recommend that you first
| | 01:48 |
create an EPUB file, and then convert it
to other formats as necessary.
| | 01:53 |
The PDB format can be read using the
eReader program, which is available on
| | 01:58 |
various smart phones, such as the iPhone,
Android phones, Blackberry phones, and
| | 02:03 |
Windows Mobile phones.
Now these are perhaps the most widely
| | 02:09 |
used formats.
There are actually other formats, but
| | 02:12 |
they're not as popular.
Even though there are several eBook
| | 02:16 |
formats available, the EPUB format has
emerged as the most prominent format in
| | 02:20 |
use today, most likely because it's an
open standard.
| | 02:25 |
In fact, when you export an eBook from
Adobe InDesign, it's exported as an EPUB file.
| | 02:30 |
An eBook in the EPUB format can be opened
and read on many of the most popular
| | 02:34 |
eBook readers today such as the Apple
iPad, the Sony Reader and the Barnes and
| | 02:38 |
Noble Nook.
All right, now that you understand what
| | 02:43 |
an eBook is, let's talk about some of the
advantages that eBooks have over
| | 02:47 |
traditional printed books.
There are three main advantages.
| | 02:52 |
First of all, eBooks are accessible.
They can be quickly downloaded to your
| | 02:58 |
computer or directly to you eBook reader
so that you can begin reading right away.
| | 03:03 |
You don't have to drive to the book
store, or wait for a book to be shipped
| | 03:06 |
to you.
And since an eBook can be purchased,
| | 03:09 |
downloaded and read immediately it is now
cheaper and easier for publishers and
| | 03:13 |
authors to distribute books, compared to
printed publishing.
| | 03:19 |
eBooks are also portable.
Since they're electronic, you can easily
| | 03:23 |
store hundreds or even thousands of
eBooks on one reading device and take
| | 03:27 |
them with you wherever you go.
I frequently travel, and I like to carry
| | 03:32 |
a lot of books with me.
Now I don't have to worry about draggin
| | 03:35 |
all that weight around any more, because
I can easily load all of my favorite
| | 03:38 |
books on my eBook reader.
And third, eBooks are secure.
| | 03:43 |
Since they're stored on a hard drive or
memory stick, eBooks can be backed up, so
| | 03:48 |
that you can recover them again later if
your eBook reader is lost or damaged.
| | 03:54 |
In fact, some distributors even let you
download a new copy of the eBooks, that
| | 03:57 |
you've already purchased.
So these are the three main advantages
| | 04:01 |
that eBooks have over traditional printed
books.
| | 04:05 |
But there are in fact even more benefits.
Depending on the capabilities of the
| | 04:09 |
eBook reading device you have.
Here are just a few of them.
| | 04:12 |
Most eBook readers provide a search
feature that allows you to search for a
| | 04:16 |
particular word or phrase and quickly
find it without the need for an index.
| | 04:22 |
In fact, it's not actually necessary to
create and index for an eBook at all.
| | 04:27 |
As if having a search function isn't
enough, many eBook readers allow you to
| | 04:31 |
highlight text, and add as many bookmarks
as you like.
| | 04:36 |
Then you can quickly jump to a
highlighted word or a bookmarked page
| | 04:39 |
with little effort.
Some eBook readers even provide a
| | 04:43 |
built-in dictionary.
For example, on my iPad I can double tap
| | 04:47 |
a word that I'm not familiar with and
quickly look up its definition without
| | 04:51 |
closing the book I'm reading.
The Amazon Kindle offers a similar function.
| | 04:57 |
And most dedicated eBook readers allow
you to change the size of the font so
| | 05:01 |
that you can read more comfortably.
If you wear glasses for reading you won't
| | 05:06 |
need them anymore when reading an eBook.
Additionally, if you aren't satisfied
| | 05:10 |
with the current font, many eBook readers
even provide a menu of fonts to choose from.
| | 05:16 |
And then there are different types of
displays.
| | 05:19 |
Some devices have a backlit display, such
as the iPad.
| | 05:24 |
You can easily read an eBook in low light
or even total darkness that way.
| | 05:28 |
And then, other reading devices have an
E-ink display.
| | 05:31 |
Such as the Sony Reader, the Amazon
Kindle, and the Barnes & Noble Nook.
| | 05:37 |
Although you need a light source to read
a book on one of these devices.
| | 05:40 |
The advantage of E-ink is that it
imitates the look and readability of a
| | 05:44 |
printed book.
At the same time, reading devices with
| | 05:49 |
E-ink displays, consume very little
power.
| | 05:53 |
The battery in my Kindle, easily last a
week.
| | 05:57 |
With all these benefits, it's no wonder,
that eBook publishing is exploding.
| | 06:01 |
It seems that a new eBook creator is
being released every month.
| | 06:05 |
And since more and more eBooks are being
downloaded every day, it's now more
| | 06:10 |
important than ever to learn how to
create eBooks.
| | 06:16 |
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Exporting an EPUB file from InDesign CS4| 00:02 |
In this lesson, I'm going to walk you
through the process of exporting an EPUB
| | 00:05 |
file from InDesign CS4.
In fact, it's really quite simple.
| | 00:10 |
The most challenging aspect of ebook
production is setting up an InDesign
| | 00:14 |
document in such a way that it can be
accurately converted to an EPUB file.
| | 00:19 |
But once everything is set up, the export
process is easy.
| | 00:22 |
The publication I currently have open has
already been set up properly.
| | 00:26 |
So, all I need to do now is export the
final EPUB file.
| | 00:30 |
To export a single InDesign document, go
up to the File menu and choose Export for
| | 00:35 |
Digital Editions, specify a location for
your EPUB file.
| | 00:41 |
I'll just send mine to the desktop, and
then click Save.
| | 00:44 |
You're then presented with several export
options.
| | 00:47 |
Let's take a brief look at each of these,
so that you get a good basic
| | 00:50 |
understanding of the purpose of each
option.
| | 00:53 |
Notice that this dialog box, is divided
into three catagories: general, images,
| | 00:59 |
and contents.
The general category contains several options.
| | 01:04 |
If the document you're exporting contains
metadata, and it definitely should, you
| | 01:08 |
want to check the Include Document
Metadata option.
| | 01:12 |
This way, the metadata is exported to the
EPUB file.
| | 01:15 |
Metadata is information about the ebook
such as the author's name, the title of
| | 01:19 |
the book, and its copyright information.
To add metadata to a document, go up to
| | 01:25 |
the File menu and choose File Info.
This document already contains all the
| | 01:30 |
necessary metadata for an ebook.
It contains the document title, the
| | 01:34 |
author's name, a description, a couple of
keywords and a copyright notice.
| | 01:41 |
All right.
I'll go ahead and go back to the Export
| | 01:44 |
dialog box.
So, just below the Include Document
| | 01:47 |
Metadata option is a place to enter the
publisher of your ebook.
| | 01:52 |
This particular metadata field is not
actually available in the File
| | 01:56 |
Information dialog box, so you'll have to
enter the publisher information here.
| | 02:03 |
This next section in the dialog box
contains three options, which let you
| | 02:07 |
determine which text formatting is used
as the basis for generating the style
| | 02:11 |
sheets in the EPUB file.
Define Styles as the default option.
| | 02:17 |
You'll want to select this option if
you've consistently applied paragraph and
| | 02:21 |
character styles to all the text in your
publication.
| | 02:25 |
This option generally gives you the most
consistent and reliable results, so I
| | 02:29 |
highly recommend it above the other two
choices.
| | 02:32 |
Choose local formatting if your
publication contains a lot of locally
| | 02:36 |
formatted text, such as bold and
italicized words, that are not formatted
| | 02:40 |
with character styles.
Now I've experimented with this option
| | 02:45 |
quite a bit, and I've discovered that the
results can be really consistent.
| | 02:50 |
So I prefer to apply paragraph and
character styles to all my text in order
| | 02:54 |
to get the most reliable results.
This third option style names only, will
| | 02:59 |
generate and empty CSS file within the
EPUB document.
| | 03:03 |
You can then edit the EPUB file and
define the style sheets yourself.
| | 03:07 |
All right let's take a look at the
options that you get in the bullets and
| | 03:10 |
numbering section.
There are two menus here.
| | 03:14 |
Now if you've used InDesign's bullets and
numbering feature to create automatic
| | 03:18 |
bulleted or numbered lists, you
definately want to consider the options
| | 03:21 |
in these two menus.
But if you've manually created your
| | 03:26 |
bulleted and numbered lists, you can
ignore these options all together.
| | 03:31 |
So what if one of your document contains
automatic bulleted or number lists, which
| | 03:36 |
options would you specify.
You would select Map To Unordered Lists
| | 03:41 |
to convert the bulleted lists to HTML
unordered lists, which are formatted with
| | 03:45 |
the UL and LI tags.
Or you can just choose to convert the
| | 03:50 |
bullets to text.
Now if you've used a fancy bullet
| | 03:53 |
character such as a square or a triangle,
you definitely want to choose Convert to Text.
| | 03:59 |
Otherwise, that symbol might not appear
correctly in the EPUB file.
| | 04:03 |
And if your document contains automatic
numbered lists, you can choose to map to
| | 04:08 |
HTML ordered lists, HTML static ordered
lists or, simply convert the numbered
| | 04:12 |
lists to text.
If your numbered lists use any other type
| | 04:17 |
of numbering other than normal numbers,
you definitely want to convert them to text.
| | 04:23 |
That way that same numbering is preserved
in your EPUB file.
| | 04:27 |
Otherwise, you can just choose Map To
Ordered Lists.
| | 04:30 |
So let's take a look at this next option,
Include Embeddable Fonts.
| | 04:35 |
Now you want to select this option if you
want to imbed all the fonts that you've
| | 04:39 |
used in your InDesign document, into the
EPUB file.
| | 04:43 |
InDesign will only export open type fonts
and most true type fonts, but post script
| | 04:48 |
fonts are definitely not embedded.
So if you've used post scrypt fonts, I
| | 04:54 |
definitely wouldn't select this option.
Also keep in mind that many ebook readers
| | 04:59 |
don't actually support embedded fonts in
EPUB files.
| | 05:03 |
Some of them do but, most of them don't.
The Sony reader for example will support
| | 05:09 |
embedded fonts.
Adobe Digital additions will as well.
| | 05:12 |
In most cases I recommend just keeping
this option turned off, unless you’re
| | 05:17 |
developing an EPUB file specifically for
a device that does support embedded fonts.
| | 05:23 |
This next option is quite obvious.
I definitely want to check it, because it
| | 05:28 |
will allow me to view my ebook,
immediately after exporting it.
| | 05:32 |
All right.
I'll go ahead and make sure Define Styles
| | 05:35 |
is selected.
And now let's take a look at the options
| | 05:37 |
in the images category.
All the option you see here, allow you to
| | 05:41 |
specify how you want your images to be
exported to the EPUB file.
| | 05:45 |
InDesigns CS4 provides two choices for
exporting images.
| | 05:50 |
You can export the original messages, or
you can export an optimized version of
| | 05:54 |
the images.
So, which option should you choose?
| | 05:58 |
When producing a document in InDesign,
you most likely use high resolution
| | 06:02 |
images to create it.
Now if you try to use the same images for
| | 06:07 |
an ebook, they're definitely going to be
too large.
| | 06:10 |
And large images consume a lot of memory
and they take longer to draw on screen.
| | 06:15 |
So if an image is too large, you might
even encounter problems with certain
| | 06:19 |
ebook readers.
Especially those ebook readers with
| | 06:23 |
limited memroy and processing power.
So if you choose Optimize from this Copy
| | 06:28 |
Images menu, InDesign will automatically
export an optimized versoin of each image.
| | 06:34 |
The images are converted to RGB with a
resolution of 72 pixels per inch, which
| | 06:38 |
will display well on most ebook readers.
And the file size of each image will be
| | 06:44 |
small enough to avoid performance and
memory issues.
| | 06:48 |
Notice that when original is selected,
all of the other options are ghosted out.
| | 06:54 |
But when you select Optimized, you're
provided with several options that allow
| | 06:58 |
you to specify how you want your images
exported.
| | 07:01 |
Now, I typically leave these settings as
is, except that I like to create higher
| | 07:05 |
quality JPEG images.
So I'll choose High from this Image
| | 07:10 |
Quality menu.
Alright.
| | 07:12 |
Let's take a look at the content section
of this dialog box.
| | 07:16 |
This section contains really two main
options.
| | 07:19 |
You can determine the format for the EPUB
content, and choose how to create the
| | 07:23 |
table of contents for your ebook.
InDesign CS4 can export the content of a
| | 07:29 |
publication, in either the XHTML or
DTBook format.
| | 07:34 |
XHTML is the standard format for most
ebooks, but you could use the DTBook
| | 07:38 |
format when making content accessible to
people with disabilities.
| | 07:44 |
But it's really not compatible with all
the different ebook readers out there, so
| | 07:48 |
in most cases you are going to use the
XHTML format.
| | 07:51 |
Now every ebook should contain a table of
contents, and in design CS4 can generate
| | 07:55 |
one for you.
Now I'm not referring to the traditional
| | 07:59 |
table of contents that you would see at
the beginning of a book.
| | 08:03 |
I'm actually referring to a table of
contents that is used as a navigation
| | 08:07 |
guide in the ebook reader.
It often appears as a menu in fact.
| | 08:12 |
That way a reader can quickly jump to a
particular section of the book, by just
| | 08:15 |
going to the Table of Contents menu and
clicking or tapping a particular section
| | 08:19 |
or chapter to jump to it.
So, here I can decide how I want that
| | 08:24 |
table of contents created.
Now if I don't check anything here, then
| | 08:29 |
InDesign will automatically create the
table of contents based on the name of
| | 08:34 |
each document.
So, I've created an InDesign TOC style.
| | 08:38 |
If you've created a TOC style, InDesign
will reference it if you check include
| | 08:44 |
InDesign TOC entries.
And then, I'll choose the TOC style that
| | 08:49 |
I created.
So, InDesign is going to reference this
| | 08:53 |
TOC style and automatically generate the
table of contents based on it.
| | 08:58 |
Essentially it's going to reference
paragraph styles, and wherever those
| | 09:02 |
paragraph styles have been applied
throughout the document.
| | 09:06 |
InDesign is going to find all the text to
which those paragraph styles have been
| | 09:10 |
applied and copy the text to create the
table of contents.
| | 09:15 |
That's essentially how it works.
Now since I'm using a TOC sytle to
| | 09:18 |
generate the table of contents, I
definitely want to make sure and select
| | 09:22 |
Surpress Automatic Entries for Documents.
Because what this does, is it keeps the
| | 09:28 |
names of the documents from appearing in
my table of contents.
| | 09:33 |
So now I'm ready to export the final EPUB
file, I'll just click Export and here in
| | 09:36 |
a moment the EPUB file will be opened
inside of Digital Editions.
| | 09:42 |
And as you can see, I have a very simple
eBook.
| | 09:46 |
So, that's how you export a single
document as an epub file but, what if you
| | 09:49 |
have a book file.
What if you're publication is made up of
| | 09:53 |
individual InDesign documents which are
combined together into a book file.
| | 09:59 |
In that case you would want to export the
EPUB file from the book itself.
| | 10:03 |
I'll show you how that works.
I'll go up to the File menu and choose Open.
| | 10:08 |
I'll navigate to the book file that I
have, which is in this folder.
| | 10:12 |
As you can see there are quite a lot of
InDesign documents that make up this book file.
| | 10:17 |
So each section of this book is contained
within individual InDesign documents.
| | 10:22 |
So I've combined all of them together
within a book file, and now I'd like to
| | 10:25 |
export an EPUB file, that contains the
entire publication.
| | 10:30 |
To do that I'm going to go to the Book
Panel menu and choose Export Book for
| | 10:34 |
Digital Editions.
I'll choose a location for the EPUB file,
| | 10:39 |
click Save and I'm presented with the
same export options we just looked at.
| | 10:45 |
So after clicking Export, InDesign will
process all of the documents in the book
| | 10:49 |
file and create one EPUB file that
contains my entire publication.
| | 10:55 |
So now you know how to export an EPUB
file from Indesign CS4.
| | 10:58 |
You might not have understood everything
I talked about, but that's okay because
| | 11:02 |
this really was just an overview of the
exporting porcess.
| | 11:06 |
We'll be looking at these options again
in much greater detail throughout the
| | 11:09 |
reast of this video training workshop.
And you'll have plenty of opportunity to
| | 11:14 |
put your new found skills into practice.
There's just one last thing that I'd like
| | 11:19 |
to mention.
It's really important to make sure that
| | 11:22 |
you're using the latest version of
InDesign CS4, if you're going to export
| | 11:26 |
EPUB files.
If you're not using this version, you
| | 11:30 |
need to go to the Help menu, and choose
updates.
| | 11:34 |
By using the latest version of InDesign,
you can be sure that you'll get the best
| | 11:37 |
EPUB export experience.
| | 11:40 |
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Exporting an EPUB file from InDesign CS5| 00:02 |
In this lesson I'm going to walk you
through the process of exporting an ePub
| | 00:06 |
file from InDesign CS5.
Exporting and ePub file is actually quite easy.
| | 00:11 |
The hardest part of eBook production is
setting up and InDesign in such a way
| | 00:15 |
that it can be successfully converted to
an ePub file.
| | 00:20 |
Once everything is setup though, the
export process itself is simple.
| | 00:24 |
It's just a matter of specifying the
right options.
| | 00:27 |
Now if you've already had some experience
with exporting ePub files for an InDesign
| | 00:32 |
CS4, you will find most of the export
options in InDesign CS5 familiar.
| | 00:37 |
There are however, several new options
that make InDesign CS5 the ideal
| | 00:42 |
application for creating eBooks.
The publication I currently have open is
| | 00:47 |
already been set up properly.
So all I need to do now is export the
| | 00:51 |
final ePub file.
To export a single InDesign document, go
| | 00:57 |
up to the File menu, choose Export For
and then ePub.
| | 01:02 |
Specify a location for your ePub file,
I'll save mine to the desktop and then
| | 01:06 |
click Save and then you're presented with
several export options.
| | 01:12 |
Let's take a brief look at each one of
these options so that you get a good
| | 01:15 |
understanding of the purpose of each of
them.
| | 01:18 |
Notice that this dialog box is divided
into three categories.
| | 01:23 |
General, Images and Contents.
The General category contains a number of options.
| | 01:29 |
If the document you're exporting contains
metadata, you'll want to check the
| | 01:33 |
Include Document Metadata option.
This way the metadata is included in the
| | 01:37 |
ePub file when you export it.
Metadata is information about an eBook.
| | 01:43 |
Such as the authors name, the title of
the book, and its copyright information.
| | 01:48 |
Now it's really important that all eBooks
contain at least some metadata because
| | 01:52 |
that's what makes an eBook searchable.
To add metadata to a document, you need
| | 01:57 |
to go to the File menu and choose File
Info.
| | 02:01 |
This opens up the File Information dialog
box, and you want to enter at least the
| | 02:06 |
document title, the author, a
description, a couple of keywords and the
| | 02:11 |
copyright notice.
In fact, these five fields are the only
| | 02:17 |
fields that are exported to an ePub file.
All right let's go back to the ePub
| | 02:22 |
Export dialog box.
Just below the Include Metadata option,
| | 02:28 |
is a place to enter your books publisher
information and a unique identifier.
| | 02:34 |
Since neither of these two fields are
available in the File Information dialog
| | 02:38 |
box, you'll have to enter this
information here.
| | 02:41 |
And what's the unique identifier for?
This is the place to enter your eBook's
| | 02:47 |
ISBN number.
If you leave this field empty, InDesign
| | 02:50 |
will automatically generate a unique
identifier for you, which is most likely
| | 02:54 |
not the number you want to use.
So if the eBook version of your
| | 02:58 |
publication has an ISBN number, go ahead
and enter it here.
| | 03:02 |
For now I'll just leave it empty.
This next set of options in the ordering
| | 03:06 |
section lets you determine the reading
order of the text and graphics in your eBook.
| | 03:12 |
If you select Base on Page Layout which
is the default selection, the reading
| | 03:15 |
order is determined by the location of
the text and graphics frames in your document.
| | 03:22 |
By default, InDesign exports the content
from left to right, and then from top down.
| | 03:28 |
Now, this choice can sometimes cause
unexpected results, especially if you're
| | 03:32 |
exporting a complex layout such as a
two-column layout, or a layout with a lot
| | 03:36 |
of sidebar elements in the margins.
So as an alternative you can select same
| | 03:42 |
as XML structure instead.
Before you can select this option though,
| | 03:47 |
your document must contain content that's
marked up with XML tags.
| | 03:52 |
When you use this option, the reading
order of the text and graphics will be
| | 03:55 |
based on the order of the XML tags in
InDesign structure pane.
| | 04:01 |
This choice is really useful for
converting complex layouts to an ePub
| | 04:04 |
file because it allows you to control the
reading order without having to modify
| | 04:08 |
your original layout.
This next section of the dialog box
| | 04:13 |
contains two menus, one for controlling
how bulleted lists are exported, and
| | 04:17 |
another for determining how numbered
lists are exported.
| | 04:22 |
So if you've used InDesign's automatic
bullets and numbering feature to create
| | 04:26 |
bulleted and or numbered lists, you need
to choose an option from these menus in
| | 04:30 |
order to specify how you want your lists
exported.
| | 04:35 |
But if you've manually created your
bulleted and numbered lists, these two
| | 04:39 |
menus won't affect how they're exported.
Now, if you have used InDesign's bullets
| | 04:44 |
and numbering feature to create bulleted
lists, select an option from this menu to
| | 04:48 |
specify how to export them.
Select Map to Unorder Lists to convert
| | 04:54 |
the bulleted lists to HTML unordered
lists which are formatted with UL, and LI tags.
| | 05:02 |
Select Convert to Text to convert them to
HTML paragraphs, which are formatted with
| | 05:06 |
the regular ptag.
And this option also converts any special
| | 05:11 |
bullet characters to actual text.
This way you can be sure, that their
| | 05:16 |
preserved in the ePub file.
And if you've used InDesign bullets and
| | 05:20 |
numbering feature to create automatic
numbered lists, you'll want to select an
| | 05:25 |
option from this menu to specify how to
export them.
| | 05:29 |
Select Map to Ordered List to convert the
numbered list to HTML ordered lists Which
| | 05:33 |
are formatted with the OL, and LI tags.
Select the Map to Static Ordered List
| | 05:40 |
option in order to convert the numbered
lists to HTML ordered lists, but also
| | 05:44 |
assign a value attribute to each list
item.
| | 05:49 |
The actual values that are used are based
on the current numbering of the lists in
| | 05:53 |
the InDesign document.
And finally, choose Convert to Text, in
| | 05:57 |
order to convert the lists to HTML
paragraphs, which again, use the basic ptag.
| | 06:04 |
This option especially useful when your
lists use a numbering systems other than
| | 06:08 |
simple numbers and you want to preserve
then in the ePub file.
| | 06:13 |
This last option View Ebook after
Exporting does exactly what it says.
| | 06:17 |
So after exporting the ePub file, the
eBook will automatically be opened up for
| | 06:21 |
me so I don't have to locate it.
Double-click it just to open it up.
| | 06:26 |
All right, let's take a look at the
options in the Images category now.
| | 06:30 |
All the options you see here allow you to
specify exactly how you want your images
| | 06:34 |
to be exported to the ePub file.
Now, if you already have experience with
| | 06:40 |
exporting ePub files from InDesign CS4,
you'll notice that this section of the
| | 06:44 |
dialog box contains the same options.
Except that there is no longer an option
| | 06:49 |
for exporting the original images.
Instead, InDesign CS5 automatically
| | 06:54 |
exports an optimized version of each
image, that displays well on most eBook readers.
| | 07:00 |
And the images are small enough to avoid
performance issues.
| | 07:04 |
InDesign automatically converts all of
your images to the RGB color mode and
| | 07:09 |
their resolution is changed to 72 pixels
per inch.
| | 07:13 |
Now I typically leave these settings as
is, except that I like to create higher
| | 07:17 |
quality JPEG images, so I'll choose High
from the Image Quality menu.
| | 07:24 |
With that said, let's take a look at the
Contents section of this dialog box.
| | 07:28 |
Now this section contains quite a few
options, but notice they are grouped
| | 07:32 |
together into three main categories.
One category that allows you to choose
| | 07:37 |
the format for the ePub content.
Another that allows you to determine how
| | 07:42 |
the Table of Contents and ePub file is
created.
| | 07:46 |
And then one more that lets you determine
how the CSS files in an ePub file are generated.
| | 07:53 |
Starting from the top, InDesign CS5 can
export the ePub content in either the
| | 07:57 |
XHTML or DT book format.
The DT book format is using for making
| | 08:01 |
content accessible to people with
disability but it's really not compatible
| | 08:06 |
with all the eBook readers out there.
So I tend to create eBooks that are based
| | 08:12 |
the XHTML format that way I can be sure
that my ePub files can be read on all the
| | 08:16 |
different eBook reading devices.
The Table of Content section allows you
| | 08:22 |
to determine how the Table of Contents in
your eBook is generated.
| | 08:27 |
It's important that every eBook contain a
table of contents because it makes your
| | 08:31 |
eBook easier to navigate.
Now the type of table of contents that
| | 08:35 |
I'm referring to, is not the traditional
table of contents that you see at the
| | 08:39 |
beginning of a book.
I'm actually referring to a Navigation
| | 08:44 |
menu in the eBook reader.
InDesign will automatically generate that
| | 08:48 |
type of table of contents for you.
Now, if you just leave these options
| | 08:53 |
deselected and export an ePub file,
InDesign is going to create a table of
| | 08:57 |
contents anyway.
But it's going to base the table of
| | 09:01 |
contents entries on the names of your
InDesign documents.
| | 09:06 |
I really don't want to see that.
So rather than base the table of contents
| | 09:10 |
on the document names, I'd like to base
the table of contents on an InDesign TOC style.
| | 09:17 |
So it's important that you first setup a
TOC style and then you can include it by
| | 09:22 |
selecting Include InDesign TOC entries
and selecting the TOC style that you've
| | 09:26 |
created from this menu.
The TOC style is used to reference
| | 09:33 |
specific paragraphs to which very
specific paragraph styles have been
| | 09:37 |
applied InDesign will look for wherever
that paragraph style is applied and copy
| | 09:41 |
that text and make table of contents
entries out of it.
| | 09:47 |
That's essentially how it works.
This next option here is quite important.
| | 09:51 |
I want to select it, Suppress Automatic
Entries for Documents, because it'll
| | 09:55 |
prevent the InDesign document names
themselves from appearing in my generated
| | 09:58 |
table of contents.
This next option used first level entries
| | 10:04 |
as chapter breaks is especially important
to use if all the content for your eBook
| | 10:08 |
is contained within a single InDesign
document.
| | 10:13 |
With this option selected, inDesign will
automatically create a separate XHTML
| | 10:17 |
file for each chapter in your document.
This is quite important because pages
| | 10:22 |
load considerably faster in an eBook
reading device when an ePub file is made
| | 10:27 |
up of multiple XHTML files.
So in other words, when you select this
| | 10:32 |
option, InDesign references the TOC style
you've set up in order to determine which
| | 10:36 |
style has been specified as a first level
entry.
| | 10:41 |
So let's say that the paragraph style
you've applied to all your chapter
| | 10:44 |
headings is called Chapter Head, and this
style has been defined as a first-level
| | 10:48 |
entry in your TOC style.
When InDesign exports the ePub file, a
| | 10:54 |
new XHTML file will be created each time
InDesign encounters a paragraph that's
| | 10:58 |
formatted with the Chapter Head paragraph
style.
| | 11:03 |
Alright.
This last category, CSS options allows
| | 11:06 |
you to determine which text formatting is
used as the basis for generating the
| | 11:11 |
style sheets in the ePub file.
Now, this option in important because it
| | 11:16 |
determines how your text is formatted in
the ePub file.
| | 11:20 |
Notice that there are three main options.
Generate CSS, Style Names Only and Use
| | 11:25 |
Existing CSS file.
You can choose to use your own CSS file
| | 11:30 |
by selecting this option.
So if you're already familiar with CSS,
| | 11:34 |
you might prefer to create your own CSS
file and use it to format the text in
| | 11:38 |
your eBook instead of having InDesign
create a CSS file for you.
| | 11:45 |
If you choose Style Names Only, InDesign
will generate a CSS file with empty styles.
| | 11:51 |
You can then open the ePub file and
define the style sheets yourself.
| | 11:55 |
Now, if you want InDesign to generate a
CSS file for you, choose Generate CSS,
| | 12:00 |
and then specify the sub options to
determine how InDesign creates the CSS file.
| | 12:08 |
If you've consistently applied paragraph
and character styles to all the text in
| | 12:12 |
your publication, you definitely want to
select Include Style Definitions.
| | 12:18 |
This option gives you the most consistent
and reliable results.
| | 12:22 |
Now if your document contains locally
formatted text, such as bold and
| | 12:26 |
italicized words, that were not formatted
with character styles, you'll want to
| | 12:30 |
select Preserve Local Overrides to make
sure your bold and italic words are
| | 12:33 |
preserved in the ePub file.
And last of all, if you want to embed the
| | 12:40 |
fonts that you've used into the ePub file
select Include Embeddable Fonts.
| | 12:46 |
Just keep in mind that InDesign only
exports open type fonts in most true type
| | 12:50 |
fonts but post script fonts are not
embedded.
| | 12:54 |
You should also be aware of the fact that
many eBook readers don't support embedded fonts.
| | 12:59 |
So if you are creating an eBook for a
specific reading device the supports
| | 13:03 |
embedded fonts, go ahead and select this
option.
| | 13:07 |
It will ensure that whoever reads your
eBook will see the text in the same fonts
| | 13:11 |
that you used.
However, if you are at all unsure which
| | 13:14 |
eBook readers your eBook will end up on,
I highly recommend that you don't embed
| | 13:18 |
the fonts.
So when you are ready to export the final
| | 13:22 |
ePub file, go ahead and just click
Export.
| | 13:26 |
The file will be exported, and as soon as
it's finished being created It'll open up automatically.
| | 13:31 |
So here's our eBook.
It's quite basic.
| | 13:34 |
It contains mostly text, but as you can
see, it's quite easy to export an ePub
| | 13:38 |
file from InDesign.
Now, I've just shown you how to export a
| | 13:44 |
single document as an ePub file.
Now, if all your documents for a
| | 13:49 |
publication are contained within a single
InDesign book file, you're going to
| | 13:53 |
want to export your ePub file from the
Book panel.
| | 13:57 |
Let me show you how that works.
From the file menu in InDesign, I'll
| | 14:01 |
choose Open.
I'll navigate throughout the folder that
| | 14:05 |
contains all my InDesign documents, and
here's a book file.
| | 14:09 |
This book file references all the
chapters in my publication.
| | 14:14 |
So each chapter is contained whiten a
separate document.
| | 14:18 |
To export the ePub file from a book file,
go to the Book panel menu, and choose
| | 14:23 |
Export Book to ePub.
I'll choose the Desktop to place my ePub
| | 14:28 |
file on, and as soon as I click Save, I'm
presented with the same dialog box we
| | 14:32 |
were looking at a few moments ago.
Now, something to be aware of, in the
| | 14:38 |
Contents section, if you choose to
include InDesign TOC entries, and
| | 14:42 |
referrence a TOC style that you've
created, go ahead and suppress the
| | 14:45 |
automatic entries for the document.
But this option, use first level entries
| | 14:52 |
as chapter breaks, is now optional.
Why?
| | 14:56 |
Because when you use an InDesign book
file to generate an ePub file, InDesign
| | 15:01 |
automatically creates a separate XHTML
file for each document in the book file.
| | 15:08 |
So that way your ePub file is composed of
multiple XHTML files which is what you want.
| | 15:14 |
So this option used for several entries
has chapters breaks is mostly useful when
| | 15:18 |
all the content for your publication is
contained within a single InDesign document.
| | 15:25 |
So, as soon as you're ready to export all
of these documents as a single ePub file,
| | 15:29 |
just click Export.
Once last thing that you should be aware
| | 15:34 |
of, InDesign is constantly being
improved.
| | 15:37 |
Its ePub feature is constantly being
updated, so it's important to stay up to
| | 15:40 |
date with the latest versions of
InDesign.
| | 15:44 |
To find out which version of InDesign you
currently have installed, you can go to
| | 15:47 |
the InDesign menu and choose About
InDesign.
| | 15:51 |
Or on the PC, find about InDesign in the
Help menu.
| | 15:54 |
I'll choose About InDesign.
If you are using an earlier version of
| | 15:58 |
InDesign, make sure and go to the Help
menu and choose Updates in order to
| | 16:02 |
update InDesign to the latest version.
That way you're sure to get the best ePub
| | 16:09 |
export results.
| | 16:10 |
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Is your publication suitable for the EPUB format?| 00:02 |
Not all publications are suitable for the
EPUB file format.
| | 00:06 |
In fact one of the main criticisms of the
EPUB format is that while it's great for
| | 00:10 |
text-centric books it may be unsuitable
for publications that require a precise
| | 00:14 |
layout or specialized formatting, such as
a comic book or a magazine.
| | 00:21 |
In this lesson, I'm going to talk a bit
more about the EPUB format in general.
| | 00:26 |
I'll explain why certain types of
documents work better as EPUB files than
| | 00:29 |
others, and I'll explain why some
documents just don't work well as EPUB
| | 00:32 |
files at all.
Perhaps the most important thing to
| | 00:37 |
understand is that the EPUB file you
create won't look like the original
| | 00:40 |
version of your publication unless its
design is quite simple.
| | 00:45 |
So, a simple novel will look much like,
if not exactly like the printed version,
| | 00:49 |
but a magazine layout with large headings
that straddle multiple columns of text
| | 00:54 |
cannot accurately be reproduced in an
EPUB file.
| | 00:59 |
So, why is that?
Well, the EPUB format was specifically
| | 01:03 |
designed to be reflowable.
In other words, the content of an EPUB
| | 01:08 |
file can adapt to different screen sizes,
and resolutions.
| | 01:13 |
And all the content of an EPUB file flows
in a linear direction.
| | 01:18 |
For example, if your publication contains
side-bar notes, and images with captions,
| | 01:22 |
the position of those elements will be
discarded in the EPUB file.
| | 01:27 |
And all the content will be displayed in
one continuous flow.
| | 01:32 |
With the sidebar notes, images and
captions running within the main body text.
| | 01:37 |
This can really cause havoc for a design
heavy magazine or a textbook.
| | 01:42 |
Imagine reading an e-book on a small
screen, such as on an iPhone.
| | 01:46 |
If that e-book has an image positioned to
the right side of some text, the screen
| | 01:50 |
wouldn't be wide enough to properly
display that page.
| | 01:55 |
So in an EPUB file, the images should
always flow above or below the text, but
| | 01:59 |
never to the side of it.
Let me show you what I mean.
| | 02:03 |
This e-book is a simple novel, so it
mostly consists of text, with an image
| | 02:08 |
appearing now and then.
As I resize this window, notice that the
| | 02:13 |
text reflows within it.
I can also modify the size of the text.
| | 02:20 |
By clicking this button up here I can
increase it, or by clicking the button to
| | 02:24 |
the left I can decrease the size of the
text.
| | 02:27 |
And as I do the text is reflowing as
well.
| | 02:31 |
In most dedicated e-book readers the
images will also automatically be resized
| | 02:35 |
to fit the screen, but with digital
additions images don't automatically resize.
| | 02:42 |
And notice that this image appears below
the paragraphs of text above it, and it
| | 02:47 |
appears above other paragraphs of text.
So, as you can see, everything is flowing
| | 02:54 |
in a linear direction.
So, now you understand why some
| | 02:58 |
publications just aren't suitable for the
EPUB file format.
| | 03:03 |
If you want to convert a more complex
layout to an eBook, the PDF format is
| | 03:07 |
probably a much better option.
Since PDF is a fixed page layout, the
| | 03:13 |
exact appearance of a publication is
preserved.
| | 03:16 |
A PDF file can even contain sophisticated
interactivity such as clickable buttons,
| | 03:22 |
audio and even video.
And a number of eBook readers out there,
| | 03:27 |
on the market, are even compatible with
the PDF format.
| | 03:31 |
So what if you want to create a EPUB
version of a publication that would
| | 03:35 |
normally be unsuitable for the EPUB
format?
| | 03:38 |
Well you would actually need to come up
with a new design, that is suitable for
| | 03:42 |
the EPUB format.
Let me show you an example of a publisher
| | 03:46 |
who has done just that.
Here is a chapter from a travel guide
| | 03:50 |
that was published by Inside Guides.
This is PDF document, which shows what
| | 03:55 |
the final printed book looks like.
As you can see the layout is quite complex.
| | 04:01 |
There are a number of sidebar elements.
As well as images with captions, so this
| | 04:06 |
is definitely not a suitable publication
for the EPUB format.
| | 04:11 |
So now let me show you the same document,
only represented as an EPUB file.
| | 04:16 |
These are actually screen shots of the
file, as it looks when it's opened on the
| | 04:20 |
iBooks app, on my iPad.
The designers at Inside Guides decided to
| | 04:24 |
come up with a design that's more
suitable for the EPUB format, so that
| | 04:27 |
they could sell their travel guides on
Apple's iBooks store.
| | 04:32 |
So here's the opening spread.
We're looking at it in a horizontal view.
| | 04:37 |
If you turn your iPad so that it's
vertically positioned, the same document
| | 04:41 |
would reformat itself, and the image
would adapt to the new screen size.
| | 04:47 |
So here's the page with the full page
image, and here's the opening page.
| | 04:53 |
So this would be the next spread view it
again in a horizontal position and that
| | 04:57 |
same page if I flip it up and view it
vertically.
| | 05:03 |
So as you can see sometimes you just have
to adapt to the constraints of the EPUB
| | 05:07 |
format in order to take advantage of it's
versatility.
| | 05:11 |
| | Collapse this transcript |
|
|
2. The Anatomy of an EPUB FileWhat's inside an EPUB file?| 00:02 |
In this lesson, I'm going to show you
what's inside an EPUB file, and I'll
| | 00:05 |
explain how the various components work.
An EPUB file is actually a package that
| | 00:11 |
contains a number of files that work
together to create the eBook experience.
| | 00:17 |
Here's an overview of the components that
make up an EPUB file.
| | 00:21 |
As you can see an EPUB file contains
quite a few files a few folders as well.
| | 00:27 |
All of these components are packaged
together into a single zip archive,
| | 00:31 |
that's given the EPUB file extension.
Alright let's take a deeper look at the
| | 00:37 |
various components that make up an EPUB
file starting with the mimetype file.
| | 00:44 |
This file identifies the package as an
EPUB file.
| | 00:48 |
Its stored as a plain text file, it has
to be located at the top level of the
| | 00:52 |
EPUB package and it can not be
compressed.
| | 00:57 |
All of the other files in the EPUB
package are compressed, but if this file
| | 01:00 |
is compressed.
The EPUB file won't be valid and you
| | 01:04 |
won't be able to open it up on an eBook
reader.
| | 01:08 |
I currently have an EPUB file open, in an
XML editor called Oxygen.
| | 01:13 |
The contents of this EPUB file, are
showing over here on the left side,
| | 01:17 |
within the Archive Browser panel.
Here you can navigate through the package.
| | 01:23 |
When you want to open a file for viewing,
or editing, simply double click it.
| | 01:27 |
So, here's the mimetype file.
I'll go ahead and open it up.
| | 01:33 |
It contains just one line of code, which
identifies this package as an EPUB file.
| | 01:40 |
Alright, I'll go ahead and close this
file.
| | 01:42 |
So, the next file that I'm going to
introduce you to, is the container.xml file.
| | 01:49 |
This XML file is stored within the
META-INF folder.
| | 01:54 |
It simply directs the eBook reader to the
content.opf file, which in turn
| | 01:58 |
references all the files that make up the
content of an EPUB file.
| | 02:04 |
I'll go ahead and open that up inside of
Oxygen, so that file is located within
| | 02:08 |
this META-INF folder.
I will flip the triangle to open that up
| | 02:13 |
and here it is, I'll double click it to
open it up.
| | 02:17 |
So, as you can see there isn't a lot of
code in this file, its main purpose is to
| | 02:21 |
reference the content.opf file which it's
doing right here.
| | 02:26 |
This is the file path to that file.
All right.
| | 02:30 |
So, the next file that I like to
introduce you to, is the encryption.xml file.
| | 02:37 |
This file is located within the META-INF
folder It's actually an optional file, so
| | 02:42 |
you won't see it in every EPUB file that
you create.
| | 02:46 |
It's only included in the EPUB files that
you export from InDesign, when you choose
| | 02:50 |
to embed the fonts into the EPUB file as
you export it.
| | 02:54 |
And it's used to encrypt the fonts that
have been embedded into the eBook.
| | 02:59 |
So, if you don't embed the fonts when you
export an EPUB file, the encryption.xml
| | 03:03 |
file won't be created.
I'll go ahead and open this file up into Oxygen.
| | 03:08 |
Now, all the code is currently located on
one line.
| | 03:12 |
So, to make this more reader-friendly,
I'm going to click this Format and Indent
| | 03:17 |
button up here, and that'll make it much
easier to read.
| | 03:22 |
As you can see here, the encryption file,
is referencing the fonts that are
| | 03:26 |
embedded into the package.
Since there are three fonts, there are
| | 03:31 |
three references, and the fonts are
located over here in the Fonts folder.
| | 03:35 |
Alright.
So, the next file that I'd like to
| | 03:40 |
introduce you to, is the content.opf
file, this file is actually an XML file.
| | 03:48 |
This is the root file of an EPUB file
because it contains the eBook's metadata.
| | 03:54 |
It identifies all the components of an
eBook, and it describes the reading order
| | 03:58 |
for the contents of an eBook.
So, this file plays an important role.
| | 04:04 |
Lets take a closer look at this file
inside of Oxygen.
| | 04:08 |
Here is the content.opf file, I'll go
ahead and double click it to open it,
| | 04:12 |
you'll find three important sections
within this file.
| | 04:17 |
There is the Metadata section, there is
the Manifest, and at the very bottom is
| | 04:22 |
the Spine.
The metadata element, is used to provide
| | 04:26 |
information about the publication as a
whole.
| | 04:30 |
Metadata is an important part of every
eBook because it describes an eBook, and
| | 04:34 |
it makes it searchable.
So, here you can see the title of my book
| | 04:39 |
is Sample eBook, the creator is Gabriel
Powell.
| | 04:44 |
The subject is eBooks, there's a
description, there's a date, a copyright,
| | 04:50 |
and an identifier.
The identifier is used for the ISBN
| | 04:55 |
number of your eBook.
And then there's a language element as well.
| | 05:00 |
The Manifest references all the files
that are part of the publication,
| | 05:06 |
including the NCX file, all of the XHTML
files, the images, and the CSS file.
| | 05:15 |
And then the Spine element is used to
determine the linear reading order of the publication.
| | 05:21 |
The order of these Item Ref elements is
very important, because they determine
| | 05:26 |
the reading order of the content in the
eBook.
| | 05:30 |
So, if I were to move this chapter one
item ref to the top of the list, chapter
| | 05:34 |
one would appear first in the book when I
open the eBook on an eBook reader.
| | 05:40 |
Alright so that's how the content .opf
file works.
| | 05:44 |
Now I'd like to introduce you to the
toc.ncx file.
| | 05:49 |
This file is also an XML file.
It provides an eBook reader with detailed
| | 05:54 |
navigation information.
And its main purpose is to serve as a
| | 05:59 |
navigation map that's generally displayed
as a menu in an eBook reader.
| | 06:04 |
Enabling you to jump directly to any of
the major sections in the eBook.
| | 06:08 |
It's essentially a table of contents for
an eBook.
| | 06:12 |
Let's open that file inside of Oxygen.
Here it is.
| | 06:15 |
I'll double click it to open it up.
When you export an EPUB file from
| | 06:20 |
InDesign, this NCX file is generated in
one of two ways.
| | 06:25 |
If you specify a TOC style when you
export the EPUB file, the NCX file is
| | 06:30 |
based on that TOC style.
But if you don't specify a TOC style,
| | 06:36 |
then this NCX file is based on the names
of your InDesign documents.
| | 06:42 |
This section of this file that contains
the navigation guide is right here within
| | 06:46 |
the Nav Map label.
This element contains several Nav point elements.
| | 06:53 |
Each Nav Point element is an entry in the
navigation guide.
| | 06:57 |
So, this is the entry for chapter one.
And when you click on that entry, you're
| | 07:02 |
taken to this file right here, chapter
two.
| | 07:06 |
So, that's how the toc.ncx file works.
Now I'll introduce you to the
| | 07:12 |
template.css file.
This file contains the CSS style sheets,
| | 07:17 |
which are used to format the content of
an EPUB file.
| | 07:22 |
It's stored as an external style sheet,
so when you change one of the CSS rules,
| | 07:26 |
all the text in the publication that that
rule is applied to gets updated.
| | 07:33 |
Let's open that file up inside of Oxygen.
These are all the CSS rules that
| | 07:39 |
determine the formatting for the text in
this eBook.
| | 07:44 |
Now the current EPUB specification
defines a style language based on CSS 2.
| | 07:50 |
But not all CSS 2 properties are actually
supported.
| | 07:55 |
So, for a complete list of all the
supported CSS properties.
| | 08:00 |
You'll want to go to the website
www.idpf.org and then click on this
| | 08:05 |
Specifications tab.
Locate the Open Publication Structure,
| | 08:14 |
right here, and then navigate to Section
3.3.
| | 08:19 |
This section gives you detailed
information about the CSS properties that
| | 08:23 |
are supported.
All right, let's take a look at the next
| | 08:27 |
component of an EPUB file.
Which are the XHTML files.
| | 08:32 |
An EPUB file can contain any number of
XHMTL files.
| | 08:36 |
Together the XHTML files conatin the
actual content of an EPUB file.
| | 08:41 |
When you export a single InDesign
document as an EPUB file, only one XHTML
| | 08:46 |
file is generated.
But when you export an InDesign Book
| | 08:51 |
file, an XHTML file is generated for each
document in the Book file.
| | 08:57 |
So, this EPUB file contains quite a
number of XHTML files, one for the cover,
| | 09:02 |
one for the table of contents, and
another for each chapter and section.
| | 09:10 |
And then there's the Images Folder.
This folder contains the actual image
| | 09:15 |
files for the eBook.
When you export an EPUB file from
| | 09:19 |
InDesign, the images are copied to this
folder according to the image export
| | 09:23 |
options that you've specified.
If your publication doesn't contain any
| | 09:28 |
images of course the images folder isn't
created.
| | 09:31 |
The EPUB specification support GIF, JPEG,
PNG and SVG image types.
| | 09:40 |
However, InDesign only exports GIF of
JPEG files.
| | 09:44 |
Unless you're using InDesign CS4, and you
choose to copy the original images when
| | 09:48 |
you export the EPUB file.
And the last folder in the e-pub package
| | 09:54 |
would be the fonts folder.
This folder contains the font file for
| | 09:59 |
the eBook ,if you choose to embed the
fonts when you exported the EPUB file
| | 10:03 |
from InDesign.
Keep in mind that only open type fonts
| | 10:08 |
and supported true type fonts, are copied
into this folder.
| | 10:12 |
Postscript font cannot be embedded within
an EPUB file so, here within the EPUB
| | 10:16 |
file that I have open, there is an images
folder.
| | 10:21 |
It contains three images, one is a JPEG,
and the two others are GIF images.
| | 10:26 |
And then there's a Fonts folder which
contains three fonts that have been
| | 10:30 |
embedded into this EPUB package.
Alright.
| | 10:34 |
So, now that I've introduced you to the
various components of an EPUB file, and
| | 10:37 |
I've explained how they're used in an
eBook.
| | 10:41 |
I'd like to go back to the website, of
the International Digital Publishing forum.
| | 10:46 |
I'll go back to their Homepage.
The EPUB file format, is based on three
| | 10:52 |
open standards.
The Open Publication Structure, the Open
| | 10:56 |
Packaging Format and the Open Container
Format.
| | 11:01 |
If you want to dive deeper into the
structure of an EPUB file, and learn even more.
| | 11:06 |
You can read the documentation for each
of these specifications just click over
| | 11:10 |
here on the Specifications tab.
And then check out each one of these documents.
| | 11:20 |
The one that you should be most concerned
with is the Open Publications Structure.
| | 11:24 |
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Introduction to XML, HTML, and XHTML| 00:02 |
An EPUB file is essentially a mini
website that's neatly packaged together
| | 00:05 |
into a single file that can be opened and
read on an e-book reader.
| | 00:11 |
If you were to open up an EPUB file, you
would find several XML files, any number
| | 00:16 |
of HTML or XHTML files, and a CSS file.
If you're not already familiar with XML,
| | 00:23 |
HTML, or CSS, it's really important that
you at least learn the basics of how
| | 00:27 |
these technologies work so that you can
successfully edit an EPUB file.
| | 00:33 |
Of course, you don't need to know
anything about XML, HTML, or CSS to
| | 00:36 |
create an EPUB file with InDesign.
But eventually, you're going to have to
| | 00:41 |
crack open an EPUB file in order to add
additional information to it or to
| | 00:45 |
enhance the formatting of the text and
graphics.
| | 00:50 |
In this lesson, I'm going to give you an
introduction to XML and HTML.
| | 00:55 |
You'll learn just what you need to know
in order to get started with editing EPUB files.
| | 00:59 |
And trust me, it's not as complicated as
it might seem.
| | 01:03 |
So, what exactly is XML?
XML stands for Extensible Markup Language.
| | 01:10 |
It's important to understand that XML is
not a programming language.
| | 01:14 |
It is simply a markup language and its
main purpose is to describe the content
| | 01:18 |
and the structure of a document.
In order to do this, descriptive tags are
| | 01:24 |
used to label the information.
The file itself is just a plain text
| | 01:28 |
document, so it doesn't have any
formatting, this means that you can use
| | 01:32 |
any standard text editor to open and edit
the contents of an XML file.
| | 01:38 |
It also means that an XML file is
compatible with any operating system,
| | 01:43 |
such as Windows or Mac OS X.
Another important purpose that XML serves
| | 01:49 |
is that the content can be easily
repurposed for different publishing needs.
| | 01:54 |
However, in the case of e-books, it's
mainly used to describe the content and
| | 01:58 |
the structure of an EPUB file.
So, how does XML work?
| | 02:04 |
It all begins with content.
Take this sentence, for example.
| | 02:08 |
At this point, we have no ideal what its
purpose is.
| | 02:11 |
It could be a heading, a subhead, or even
just a paragraph within a body of text.
| | 02:17 |
We don't know until it's labeled with XML
tags.
| | 02:22 |
Tags are the building blocks of an XML
file.
| | 02:25 |
You need tags to label the content.
You need a start tag and you need an end tag.
| | 02:31 |
So, everything in between the start and
end tags is content, which is also
| | 02:35 |
referred to as data.
This whole structure is referred to as an element.
| | 02:41 |
So in this case, we're looking at a
headline element.
| | 02:45 |
Notice that there's a slash within the
end tag.
| | 02:49 |
This acts as a signal to the XML
processor that this element has completed.
| | 02:54 |
If an element is not properly closed with
a valid end tag, an XML processing error
| | 02:58 |
will occur.
Also notice that the name of the start
| | 03:03 |
tag exactly matches the name of the end
tag.
| | 03:07 |
Not only must the names match, but the
case must match as well because XML is case-sensitive.
| | 03:14 |
The tag names themselves can be anything
you want, which is why XML is called the
| | 03:18 |
Extensible Markup Language.
Alright, let's take a look at a more
| | 03:22 |
complex structure.
Here, we're looking at a complete XML file.
| | 03:27 |
It contains the content for a single
business card.
| | 03:31 |
Notice that there are many start and end
tags.
| | 03:34 |
As I said a moment ago, tags are the
building blocks of an XML file.
| | 03:39 |
Now, if you study this structure
carefully, you can see that elements
| | 03:43 |
exist within other elements.
Notice that the name element contains two
| | 03:47 |
elements, the first and the last name.
When an element contains other elements,
| | 03:53 |
it's called a container element.
The element that contains all of the
| | 03:57 |
other elements is called the root
element, since it's the outermost element
| | 04:02 |
in the document and this entire structure
is referred to as a document tree.
| | 04:08 |
So as you can see, this XML file
describes the content and the structure
| | 04:11 |
of a single business card.
The card contains a name, which is made
| | 04:16 |
up of a first and a last name.
It also contains an address, which is
| | 04:21 |
made up of a street, city, state, and zip
code.
| | 04:26 |
I'll go ahead and highlight all the
content in the document.
| | 04:29 |
Imagine this content without any XML
markup, without the tags and the
| | 04:33 |
structure of the tags.
You will only see a name and what appears
| | 04:37 |
to be a address, but you wouldn't know
what the content is intended for and you
| | 04:41 |
wouldn't know that it is for business
card.
| | 04:46 |
As you can see XML is really quite simple
there is definitely more to XML than this
| | 04:49 |
but at least this is enough information
you get you started.
| | 04:54 |
So, now that you understand the basics of
XML, let me introduce you to HTML.
| | 04:59 |
What is HTML?
Well, it stands for Hyper Text Markup Language.
| | 05:05 |
HTML is closely related to XML.
In fact, it's really a loosely defined
| | 05:11 |
subset of XML and it's used to describe
web pages.
| | 05:15 |
Like XML, an HTML file consists of the
descriptive tags, which surround the
| | 05:20 |
content and add structure and meaning to
it.
| | 05:24 |
HTML is also stored in a plain text
format.
| | 05:28 |
So it doesn't contain any formatting.
Now, at this point, you might be
| | 05:32 |
wondering how is the text in an HTML
document formatted?
| | 05:37 |
Well, that's what a web browser is for.
A web browser such as Safari or Firefox
| | 05:41 |
reads an HTML document and displays it as
a web page.
| | 05:47 |
The web browser doesn't display the HTML
tags, but instead, it uses the tags to
| | 05:51 |
interpret and format the contents of the
web page.
| | 05:56 |
With e-books, HTML files are used to
describe the formatting and the structure
| | 05:59 |
of the text within the e-book.
So an e-book reader plays the same role
| | 06:04 |
that a web browser plays.
It uses the HTML tags to interpret and
| | 06:10 |
format the contents of an e-book.
So now, you're probably wondering how XML
| | 06:15 |
and HTML are different.
Before I answer that question, let's take
| | 06:20 |
a look at the structure of a basic HTML
file.
| | 06:24 |
The text between the HTML start tag and
the HTML end tag describes the entire
| | 06:28 |
webpage or in an e-book, this would be an
entire chapter.
| | 06:34 |
The text between the body tags is the
visible page content.
| | 06:38 |
The text between the h1 tags is displayed
as a heading and the text between the p
| | 06:42 |
tags is displayed as a paragraph.
Let's see how this text is rendered by a
| | 06:47 |
web browser.
I've created a text file that contains
| | 06:51 |
the same HTML we were just looking at.
This is just a plain text file with the
| | 06:57 |
extension .html.
I'll go ahead and open it up into Safari.
| | 07:03 |
And notice that my web browser has
interpreted the markup and it's formatted
| | 07:06 |
the text.
We're looking at the default formatting
| | 07:10 |
for an h1 and a p tag.
Alright, let's take a look at a more
| | 07:14 |
advanced example of an HTML file.
I'll go ahead and close this document.
| | 07:19 |
And I'll right-click this advanced HTML
file document, and choose Open With, and
| | 07:23 |
then Text Edit, to open it up into my
text editor.
| | 07:27 |
And to make it a little easier for you to
read, I'll go ahead and increase the size
| | 07:31 |
of the font.
So this HTML file contains several headings.
| | 07:37 |
It contains an hI, h2, and h3 headings.
There are two paragraphs.
| | 07:42 |
Notice within the second paragraph, I
have some bold tags, so these tags b and
| | 07:47 |
I will apply bold and italic formatting
to those words.
| | 07:52 |
And then, also notice here, I have what
is called an unordered list which is what
| | 07:57 |
ul stands for.
Within this unordered list, I have
| | 08:02 |
several list items, each list item is its
own paragraph.
| | 08:08 |
Watch what happens when I open this
document up into Safari.
| | 08:13 |
The different headings were interpreted
and formatted accordingly as three
| | 08:16 |
different sized headings.
And notice the bold and italic words were
| | 08:21 |
properly formatted and that unordered
list became a bulleted list.
| | 08:26 |
I can quickly turn this bulleted list
into a numbered list by changing the markup.
| | 08:31 |
So a numbered list in HTML is called an
ordered list.
| | 08:36 |
So I'll change the ul tag to ol.
Again, I need make sure and change both
| | 08:42 |
the start tag and the end tag.
So I'll go ahead and do that.
| | 08:46 |
I'll Save this document, and I'll Open it
back up into Safari.
| | 08:50 |
And now, you can see that this is a
numbered list.
| | 08:55 |
So as you can see a web browser used HTML
tags to interpret and format the contents
| | 08:59 |
of a webpage.
So let's go back to the question I asked
| | 09:04 |
earlier, what's the difference between
XML and HTML?
| | 09:08 |
Well, in an EPUB file, XML is used to
describe both the content and the
| | 09:12 |
structure of all of the components of the
file.
| | 09:16 |
It's also used to create the table of
contents which appears as a navigation
| | 09:20 |
guide in an e-book reader and it's used
to list the e-book's metadata, such as
| | 09:25 |
the author, title, and the copyright
information for the e-book.
| | 09:31 |
HTML on the other hand is used to define
the actual content of an EPUB file.
| | 09:37 |
You should also know that XML is a strict
markup language, but HTML is actually a
| | 09:42 |
loosely defined subset of XML.
In fact, the HTML language is so flexible
| | 09:48 |
that many web browsers have added their
own functionality to the base HTML
| | 09:52 |
language making it really difficult for
web developers to do their job.
| | 09:59 |
As a result, a much more regulated and
standardized markup language known as
| | 10:03 |
XHTML was developed.
XHTML stands for Extensible Hypertext
| | 10:08 |
Markup Language and is actually a
combination of HTML and XML, which makes
| | 10:13 |
it a stricter form of HTML.
In fact, when you export an EPUB file
| | 10:20 |
from InDesign, InDesign creates XHTML
files instead of HTML files.
| | 10:26 |
So when you edit an EPUB file that was
created with InDesign, you'll be working
| | 10:30 |
with XHTML files.
Alright, so there you have it.
| | 10:35 |
Now, you have a basic understanding of
how XML and HTML or XHTML works.
| | 10:42 |
There's certainly more to learn, but, but
the knowledge that you have now, you'll
| | 10:45 |
be able to start editing EPUB files.
| | 10:47 |
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Introduction to CSS| 00:02 |
A CSS file is one of the core components
of an eBook.
| | 00:06 |
It determines the formatting of all the
text in an eBook.
| | 00:09 |
So it's really important that you
understand how CSS works.
| | 00:13 |
With a good understanding of CSS, you'll
have a lot more control over how your
| | 00:17 |
eBooks are designed.
In this lesson, I'm going to introduce
| | 00:21 |
you to CSS, and explain how it works.
Then I'm going to demonstrate how a CSS
| | 00:27 |
file is used to format the contents of an
e-book.
| | 00:31 |
So what exactly is CSS?
CSS stands for cascading style sheets.
| | 00:37 |
Like HTML, CSS is stored in a plain text
file, which has the file extension.css.
| | 00:44 |
It defines how HTML elements are
displayed.
| | 00:49 |
Remember, HTML, or XHTML, only describes
the content and the structure of a document.
| | 00:57 |
So you need CSS to define the formatting
of that content.
| | 01:01 |
You can compare CSS with paragraph and
character styles in InDesign.
| | 01:06 |
They function in much the same way.
For example, if you've applied a
| | 01:09 |
particular paragraph style to all the
headings in a document, and you later
| | 01:13 |
decide to change the color of those
headings All you have to do is update the
| | 01:17 |
heading paragraph style and all the
heading in the document are instantly updated.
| | 01:25 |
So CSS works the same way.
It allows you to globally format the
| | 01:30 |
various elements in HTML file.
You might think of a CSS file as a
| | 01:35 |
template When you export an EPUB file
from InDesign, all the paragraph and
| | 01:39 |
character styles that are used in your
document are converted to CSS styles.
| | 01:45 |
That is, if you choose to include the
style definitions when you export the
| | 01:50 |
EPUB file.
So how does CSS work?
| | 01:54 |
Let's take a look at the basic syntax of
CSS.
| | 01:58 |
This line of code is a single CSS Rule
which in InDesign is called a Style.
| | 02:05 |
The CSS Rule has two main parts, a
Selector and one or more Declarations.
| | 02:11 |
The Selector identifies the HTML element
you want to style.
| | 02:16 |
So this particular CSS Rule will be
applied to a p tag and its purpose is to
| | 02:21 |
style the body text in an eBook.
A CSS declaration is made up of two
| | 02:26 |
parts, a property and a value, so in this
case color is the property and black is
| | 02:31 |
the value Notice that the colon is used
to separate the property from its value.
| | 02:41 |
In the second decoration text-align is
the property and text is the value, again
| | 02:45 |
a colon is used to separate them.
CSS decorations must always end with a
| | 02:51 |
semi colon and groups of declarations are
surrounded by curly brackets.
| | 02:59 |
So this CSS rule simply defines the body
text as black and left aligned.
| | 03:05 |
Pretty simple isn't it?
To make CSS even easier to read and edit
| | 03:09 |
you can put each declaration on its own
line like this.
| | 03:14 |
Alright, so now that you understand the
basic syntax of CSS, I'll demonstrate how
| | 03:19 |
the CSS file is connected to the HTML
files in an eBook.
| | 03:24 |
This folder contains both an HTML file
and a CSS file, right now the HTML file
| | 03:29 |
is not connected to the CSS file.
So when I open it into my web brwoser the
| | 03:35 |
default formatting is applied to the
text.
| | 03:39 |
Looks pretty boring doesn't it to connect
the HTML file to the CSS file I need to
| | 03:43 |
add an additional line of code to the
HTML file.
| | 03:48 |
In text edit I already have both of these
files open this CSS file contains three
| | 03:54 |
CSS rules.
One for the chapter title another one for
| | 03:58 |
the chapter subtitle and yet another for
the body text.
| | 04:04 |
Notice that the body text rule specifies
a font size of one m unit which is equal
| | 04:09 |
to the current font size.
You could specify another unit of
| | 04:15 |
measure, such as points or pixels, but
the M unit is very useful in CSS because
| | 04:19 |
it automatically adapts to the font that
the ebook reader is set at.
| | 04:26 |
So if the current font size of your eBook
reader is set at 12 points, then 1m is
| | 04:31 |
equal to 12 points, 2m is equal to 24
points, and so on.
| | 04:38 |
Since the subtitle is using a font size
of 2 em units, it will always be twice as
| | 04:42 |
large as the body text, and the chapter
title will always be three times larger
| | 04:47 |
than the body text.
All right, let's connect this CSS file to
| | 04:53 |
my HTML file, which I have opened over
here on the left side.
| | 04:59 |
To do that, I need to add a head section
above the body section of the document.
| | 05:05 |
I'll add an extra return above the body
section, and insert a couple of spaces to
| | 05:09 |
make the HTML code a little easier to
read.
| | 05:13 |
And now I'll inset the starting tag for
the head element followed by a return.
| | 05:19 |
Now I am going to inset a link element
within a head section.
| | 05:23 |
The link element defines the relationship
between the html and an external resource
| | 05:28 |
such as the CSS file.
I'll insert a couple of spaces to insert
| | 05:34 |
the element, and I'll type link.
Within the link element, I need to insert
| | 05:40 |
three attributes.
The first attribute I want to insert is
| | 05:44 |
the href attribute, and it equals a
specific value.
| | 05:49 |
The value specifies the location of the
linked document, that is the location of
| | 05:54 |
the CSS file.
Now, in this case the CSS file that I'm
| | 06:00 |
using is in the same folder that the HTML
file is in.
| | 06:04 |
So all I need to do is type in the name
of the CSS file.
| | 06:10 |
The next attribute that I want to insert,
is the rel attribute, which stands for relationship.
| | 06:18 |
It specifies the relationship between the
HTML document, and the linked document.
| | 06:24 |
In this case, I want to reference a CSS
file, so I'll type in style sheet.
| | 06:30 |
And then, the last attribute that I need
to insert, is the type attribute.
| | 06:36 |
This specifies the type of document that
I'm linking to.
| | 06:40 |
In this case, this is a text file with
the CSS file extension and then to end
| | 06:44 |
this element, I'll insert a slash
followed by a greater than symbol.
| | 06:51 |
Next I'll insert the end tag for the head
section.
| | 06:54 |
Now in order for this HTML document to be
valid, I have to insert a title element
| | 06:59 |
within the head section.
I'll insert the title element above the
| | 07:06 |
link element.
The title can actually be anything you
| | 07:14 |
like, this is the text that appears as
the name of the web page in your browser,
| | 07:20 |
I'll type chapter one followed by
discovering how CSS works and then I need
| | 07:25 |
to insert the end tag.
All right I've now established a
| | 07:33 |
relationship between this HTML document
and this CSS file.
| | 07:39 |
Next I need to identify where the CSS
rule should be applied.
| | 07:44 |
Right now the chapter title, subtitle,
and both paragraphs are contained within
| | 07:49 |
p tags.
So they're being formatted as basic
| | 07:52 |
paragraphs to assign style information to
these elements, I need to identify each
| | 07:56 |
of them with a class attribute.
The class attribute is inserted within
| | 08:02 |
the start tag of an element.
So, I'll click withing the starting tag
| | 08:08 |
here, in this P tag, enter a space, and
to insert the class attribute I'll type
| | 08:14 |
in class equals and the value for this is
title.
| | 08:21 |
Notice that the value is enclosed in
quotes.
| | 08:23 |
So the HTML file references my
template.css file locates the CSS rule
| | 08:29 |
called title and applies this specific
formatting here to all the text enclosed
| | 08:36 |
within this p tag or p element.
I'll go ahead and insert another class
| | 08:45 |
attribute for the subtitle, so this
equals subtitle.
| | 08:50 |
Notice that I'm not inserting the p dot
subtitle, you only need to include the
| | 08:55 |
name after the period.
Now, I'll go ahead and insert the class
| | 09:02 |
attributes for the body text and for the
last paragraph as well.
| | 09:16 |
I'll go ahead and save the file.
Now when you export an EPUB file from
| | 09:20 |
InDesign, all of this coding is taken
care of for you, so you'll never need to
| | 09:23 |
enter all of this code yourself.
But I think it's helpful to understand
| | 09:29 |
just how a CSS file is connected to an
HTML file, because later on you'll
| | 09:33 |
want to add special formatting to an
eBook and you'll definitely need to know
| | 09:37 |
how all this works before you can do
that.
| | 09:42 |
Alright, let's take a look at the results
of my work.
| | 09:46 |
I'll open the HTML file to see the
results, and there you go.
| | 09:51 |
This HTML file is now referencing the CSS
file I made, and the CSS rules are being
| | 09:56 |
used to format the various elements.
So, this is also how a CSS file is used
| | 10:03 |
to format the contents of an eBook, now
let me demonstrate the full power of CSS.
| | 10:11 |
I'll hide Safari and I'll make a quick
change to the CSS file.
| | 10:17 |
I'll change the color of the chapter
title to red and I'll make the text a
| | 10:21 |
little bigger.
I'll make it 3.5 m units, I'll save the
| | 10:26 |
CSS file and then I'll go back to Safari.
Now I just need to refresh the page and
| | 10:34 |
the new changes are loaded, there it is
its a little bigger and its color is red.
| | 10:40 |
Now if I were to drag this window to the
left to make it a little bit smaller
| | 10:44 |
you'll see that the text is crashing into
the edges of the page area.
| | 10:52 |
So I can fix that by adding a couple of
declarations to the body rule.
| | 10:58 |
I'm going to add a margin left value,
margin hyphen left followed by a colon.
| | 11:07 |
.And then I’ll give it a value of 25
pixels, so I’ll type PX for pixels.
| | 11:12 |
I also want a margin on the right side so
I’ll type in margin-right followed by a
| | 11:18 |
colon and once again 25 pixels and end
that with a semi-colon I'll save this
| | 11:23 |
document, go back to Safari and refresh
the page.
| | 11:31 |
So, as you can see with CSS, you can
quickly reformat all the content of a
| | 11:36 |
webpages and when it comes to eBooks CSS
makes it possible to quickly reformat an
| | 11:41 |
entire eBook.
| | 11:45 |
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Editing an EPUB file in Mac OS X| 00:02 |
After exporting an EPUB file from
InDesign, it's often necessary to modify it.
| | 00:07 |
For example, you might want to modify the
CSS file so that you can add special
| | 00:10 |
formatting to your EPUB file.
Or you might need to modify the entries
| | 00:15 |
in the Table of Contents.
In fact, it's always necessary to edit an
| | 00:20 |
EPUB file in order to add additional
metadata to it because not all the
| | 00:23 |
required metadata is exported from
InDesign.
| | 00:27 |
In this lesson, I'm going to walk you
through the process of cracking open an
| | 00:31 |
EPUB file so that you can edit its
content.
| | 00:34 |
I'm also going to introduce you to
several applications that can be used to
| | 00:38 |
edit an EPUB file.
An EPUB file is actually just a zip
| | 00:41 |
compressed package that contains all the
pieces of a publication.
| | 00:46 |
So, to open an EPUB file, all you have to
do is change the file extension from
| | 00:50 |
.epub to .zip and then, extract the
contents of the Archive.
| | 00:55 |
I'll go ahead and do that but before I
do, I'll make a copy of this EPUB file by
| | 00:59 |
holding the Option key.
I'll drag this document and that'll make
| | 01:04 |
a copy of it.
Now, to edit the file name, I'll just
| | 01:07 |
click right on the file name and wait for
a moment.
| | 01:10 |
Now, I can edit the file extension.
I'll just change it from EPUB to zip and
| | 01:15 |
press Return.
Now, I'm asked if I'm sure that I want to
| | 01:18 |
change the file extension to .zip and, of
course, I'm sure, so I'll click Use Zip.
| | 01:24 |
Now, I can just double-click the Archive
to unArchive it.
| | 01:28 |
Now sometimes, on Mac OS X, the archive
isn't properly extracted and instead of
| | 01:33 |
getting a folder, you'll see yet another
Archive file.
| | 01:37 |
In that case, you'll need to use a
dedicated utility such as Springy to
| | 01:41 |
unArchive the file.
I'll just drag this zip file to the
| | 01:45 |
Springy icon on my desktop to open it up.
So now, we're looking at the contents of
| | 01:52 |
an EPUB file.
Within the OEBPS folder, you'll find all
| | 01:56 |
of the XHTML files, which contain the
actual content of your eBook.
| | 02:00 |
I can edit the various components of an
EPUB file using a simple text editor such
| | 02:04 |
as Text Edit.
Let me show you how that works.
| | 02:07 |
I'll drag this Part 1 document over to
the desktop to make a copy of it.
| | 02:12 |
And now, I'll drag this file over to the
top of Text Edit and release the mouse
| | 02:16 |
button to open it up.
So, this file contains all the content of
| | 02:21 |
Part 1 of my eBook.
Notice with Text Edit, it's really
| | 02:25 |
difficult to differentiate between the
content and the markup.
| | 02:29 |
To make the editing process easier, you
can also use a dedicated HTML or XML
| | 02:34 |
editor to edit the files within an EPUB
document.
| | 02:38 |
Over here on the left side of my desktop,
I have three applications, which work
| | 02:42 |
really well for editing XML, XHTML, and
CSS files.
| | 02:47 |
I have BBEdit installed, Oxygen XML
Editor, and the Author XML editor.
| | 02:53 |
Let's see how the same chapter looks,
when opened up inside of BBEdit.
| | 02:58 |
Notice that the markup is color coded, so
you can easily differentiate between the
| | 03:02 |
markup and the actual content of the
eBook.
| | 03:06 |
For this reason, I prefer to use a
dedicated HTML or XML editor instead of
| | 03:11 |
Text Edit.
You can find more information about
| | 03:15 |
BBEdit by visiting the Bare Bones website
at www.barebones.com.
| | 03:21 |
And Bare Bones Software also offers a
free editor called Text Wrangler.
| | 03:25 |
You might want to check it out at as
well.
| | 03:27 |
Another great application for editing the
contents of an EPUB file is Oxygen XML Editor.
| | 03:33 |
Let's see how this exact same content
looks inside of Oxygen.
| | 03:38 |
I'll close this document, and now, I'll
drag it over to the top of the Oxygen
| | 03:42 |
icon and release the mouse button to open
it up.
| | 03:46 |
Notice that markup is color coded here as
well.
| | 03:49 |
Oxygen is a professional tool for editing
XML, and much, much more.
| | 03:54 |
It's likely overkill for your needs, so
the same company who created Oxygen XML
| | 03:59 |
Editor, SyncRO Soft, also offers a
lighter version of this same editor
| | 04:03 |
called Author XML Editor.
It's a less expensive alternative, and it
| | 04:09 |
works just as good as Oxygen when it
comes to editing EPUB files.
| | 04:13 |
I'll go ahead and open up this same
chapter inside of Author.
| | 04:17 |
And as you can see, the interface looks
very similar, with many of the same tools
| | 04:20 |
that Oxygen provides.
You can find out more about Oxygen and
| | 04:26 |
Author, by visiting www.oxygenxml.com.
Now, one application I haven't mentioned
| | 04:32 |
yet is Adobe Dreamweaver, which you
probably already have if you've installed
| | 04:35 |
the right version of the Creative Suite.
Now, if you have Dreamweaver, you can
| | 04:40 |
also use that program to edit the
contents of an EPUB file.
| | 04:44 |
So, after making all the necessary edits
to your EPUB file, you need to archive
| | 04:48 |
all the components as a zip file again.
Let me show you how that works.
| | 04:54 |
Now, if you haven't used this Springy
application to open up your zip archive,
| | 04:57 |
and you instead double-clicked the zip
file to unArchive it, you'll need to use
| | 05:01 |
the terminal application to recreate the
EPUB file.
| | 05:06 |
Unfortunately, you can't just recreate a
new zip file and simple change the file
| | 05:10 |
extension back to .epub because if you
do, you'll break the file, and you won't
| | 05:14 |
be able to open it up again.
Once again, that application you need to
| | 05:19 |
use for recreating the EPUB file is
called Terminal.
| | 05:23 |
And you can find it by going up here to
the Go menu and choosing Utilities.
| | 05:27 |
This opens up the Utilities folder and at
the bottom, you'll be able to find the
| | 05:31 |
terminal application, I'll go ahead and
open it up.
| | 05:36 |
So, after launching terminal, you'll need
to type in the following four commands.
| | 05:41 |
The first command specifies the location
of the folder that contains the
| | 05:44 |
components of my EPUB file.
I'll type in cd, followed by a space,
| | 05:49 |
that stands for change directory, and now
I need to type in the file path of where
| | 05:53 |
that folder is located.
It's located in my Home folder, on the Desktop.
| | 06:00 |
But notice its name contains spaces, so I
need to enclose the folder name in quotes.
| | 06:06 |
And now, I can press Return.
So now, that that directory has been
| | 06:10 |
discovered, the next three commands will
actually compress the file and create the
| | 06:14 |
EPUB document.
I'll type in zip followed by the name of
| | 06:18 |
the EPUB ile that I'd like to create.
I'll just call it file.epub and then this
| | 06:23 |
is the Compression method I'd like to use
for the first file.
| | 06:27 |
That is, minus capital X zero capital D,
and then the name of the file is mindtype.
| | 06:33 |
This is actually the first file within
the EPUB document, and it shouldn't be compressed.
| | 06:40 |
I'll press Return.
And notice that the mindtype file has
| | 06:44 |
been added but it's been stored at 0%.
So, it hasn't been compressed.
| | 06:50 |
I'll type in the next command zip, again
followed by the name of EPUB file I'd
| | 06:54 |
like to use, file.epub.
This time I'll type minus capital X 9
| | 07:00 |
lower case r capital D, that actually
stands for Open eBook Publications Structure.
| | 07:07 |
I need to end that with a slash and then
press Return.
| | 07:12 |
So, all the files within that folder have
been compressed and you can see that
| | 07:15 |
because here it says, deflated.
So, the last command that I want to enter
| | 07:21 |
is zip followed by, again, file.epub,
followed by, once again, negative capital
| | 07:27 |
X 9 lowercase r capital D.
And then the name of the last folder I
| | 07:33 |
want to compress and that's meta-inf
followed by a slash, I'll press return
| | 07:37 |
and that deflates or compresses that last
file.
| | 07:43 |
Alright, so once you've entered the last
command, the EPUB file can be found
| | 07:47 |
within the original folder, and it'll be
named file.epub in this case, because
| | 07:51 |
that's the file name I chose.
I'll go ahead and double-click it to open
| | 07:56 |
it up, just to make sure it will, and it
works.
| | 07:59 |
So, while this method of opening and
editing EPUB files doesn't require any
| | 08:03 |
additional software, it's really
cumbersome.
| | 08:06 |
And you don't want to have to repeat this
process each time you make a change to an
| | 08:10 |
EPUB file because it can easily take up a
few hours of your day.
| | 08:15 |
So, if you're serious about eBook
publishing, you'll want to use another method.
| | 08:20 |
Another way to open an EPUB file and make
edits to its content is to use a
| | 08:23 |
combination of the Springy archiver
application in the Text Editor, such as BBEdit.
| | 08:30 |
Let me show you how that works.
I'll go ahead and use Springy to open up
| | 08:34 |
the EPUB file.
But this time, I'm going to open the
| | 08:37 |
actual EPUB file.
When using Springy to open up an EPUB
| | 08:40 |
file, you don't actually have to convert
the file extension to .zip before opening
| | 08:44 |
it up.
I'll just drag the icon directly on top
| | 08:48 |
of the Springy Application icon and
release the mouse button.
| | 08:52 |
I have actually unArchived the file.
I'm simply browsing the contents of the file.
| | 08:57 |
Well, go ahead and make an edit to Part
1.
| | 09:00 |
Now, I can directly edit it within the
Archive, if I right-click the file and
| | 09:05 |
from the Edit With menu, choose BBEdit.
Of course, you can use another Text
| | 09:10 |
Editor if you like.
I'll make a really simple change to this file.
| | 09:14 |
I'll locate the word part and I'll change
this to the word chapter instead.
| | 09:19 |
I'll save the file, I'll close it.
And now notice here in Springy, I'm being
| | 09:23 |
asked if I'd like to overwrite that file,
which already exists in the Archive.
| | 09:28 |
I definitely want to overwrite it.
And now, I'll close this file, although I
| | 09:32 |
don't need to close the Window.
I'll double-click the EPUB file to open
| | 09:37 |
it up, and let's find out if that change
was successfully made.
| | 09:40 |
And since the eBook opens up, I can see
that it has been made properly, and I'll
| | 09:45 |
navigate to Part 1, and there it is,
Chapter 1.
| | 09:50 |
So, this is a really easy and rather
inexpensive method for editing EPUB
| | 09:53 |
files, but it's still a little
time-consuming.
| | 09:57 |
If you plan to create a lot of eBooks, I
recommend using either Oxygen XML Editor
| | 10:02 |
or Author XML Editor to both open and
edit EPUB files.
| | 10:08 |
Either one of these editors can directly
open an EPUB file so you don't have to
| | 10:12 |
first unArchive the EPUB file before
opening it up and editing its components.
| | 10:18 |
Let me show you how that works.
To open an EPUB file directly inside of
| | 10:21 |
Oxygen or Author, you'll need to first
open the application and then from the
| | 10:26 |
Perspective menu, choose Show View and
then Archive Browser.
| | 10:32 |
That opens up this window over here on
the left, which allows you to open up an
| | 10:36 |
Archive directly.
I'll click the Open Archive button,
| | 10:40 |
navigate to locate the EPUB file that I'd
like to edit, and after clicking Open, we
| | 10:44 |
can now view the components of the EPUB
file over here in this Navigation pane.
| | 10:50 |
How handy is that?
I'll go ahead and open up the Part 2
| | 10:53 |
XHTML file.
I double-click it, and that opens it
| | 10:56 |
directly into the Content window, and now
I can make a change.
| | 11:01 |
Again, this time, I'll just change the
word part to chapter.
| | 11:05 |
I'll save this file, and the first time
you save an XML file or XHTML file that's
| | 11:10 |
part of an EPUB file, you'll be asked if
you'd like to make a backup.
| | 11:16 |
I'm going to select No Backup, and I
never want to have this question asked
| | 11:20 |
again, so I'll click OK.
That saves the file.
| | 11:23 |
I'll go ahead and hide Oxygen, and
double-click the EPUB file to open it up.
| | 11:28 |
Notice I didn't have to actually close
any files.
| | 11:32 |
I can immediately see if the results are
what I want, and they are.
| | 11:36 |
The word part was changed to chapter.
So, as you can see, by using Oxygen, or
| | 11:41 |
you could use Author, you can quickly
open an EPUB file, make a change to it,
| | 11:45 |
save it, and open the EPUB file back up
to see the results.
| | 11:51 |
With this level of productivity, it's
definitely worth your investment in this program.
| | 11:55 |
So now, you know how to edit an EPUB file
on Mac OS X, and as you can see, there
| | 11:59 |
are several ways to both open and edit
EPUB files.
| | 12:04 |
If you're serious about eBook production,
I wouldn't settle for anything less than
| | 12:08 |
a great XML Editor.
| | 12:10 |
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Editing an EPUB file in Windows| 00:02 |
After exporting an EPUB file from
InDesign, it's often necessary to make
| | 00:05 |
further changes to it, that can't
otherwise be done within InDesign.
| | 00:11 |
For example, you might want to modify the
CSS file so that you can enhance the
| | 00:14 |
formatting of the text.
Or you might need to modify the table of contents.
| | 00:20 |
In fact it's always necessary to edit an
EPUB file in order to add additional
| | 00:23 |
metadata to it, because not all the
required metadata is exported from InDesign.
| | 00:29 |
In this lesson, I'm going to walk you
through the process of cracking open an
| | 00:33 |
EPUB file so that you can edit its
content.
| | 00:37 |
I'm also going to introduce you to
several applications that can be used to
| | 00:40 |
edit an EPUB file.
An EPUB file is really just a zip
| | 00:44 |
compressed package, that contains all the
pieces of a digital publication.
| | 00:49 |
So to open an EPUB file you just need to
use a zip file utility such as WinZip.
| | 00:55 |
Here is the eBook that I'd like to open
up.
| | 00:57 |
I'll go ahead and drag the icon to the
WinZip application icon, and release the
| | 01:01 |
mouse button to open the EPUB file.
So, now we are looking at the contents of
| | 01:07 |
an EPUB file.
Within the OEBPS folder you'll find all
| | 01:11 |
the XHTML files, which contain the actual
content of the eBook.
| | 01:17 |
And by the way, OEBPS stands for Open
Ebook Publication Structure.
| | 01:22 |
I'll go ahead and view the contents of
this folder as a list to make it easier
| | 01:25 |
to see all the files.
So, now that I have opened the EPUB file.
| | 01:30 |
I can edit its various components using a
simple text editor, such as Notepad.
| | 01:35 |
I'll go ahead and open one of the
chapters of my eBook up into Notepad.
| | 01:39 |
To do that, I'll right-click an icon, and
from the Open With menu, I'll choose Notepad.
| | 01:45 |
And here is all the content for Part 10
of my eBook.
| | 01:49 |
As you can see, with such a simple text
editor, it's really difficult to
| | 01:53 |
differentiate between the markup and the
actual content, so I prefer to use a
| | 01:57 |
dedicated HTML or XML code editor
instead.
| | 02:02 |
Over on the left side of my desktop, I
have three applications which work really
| | 02:07 |
well for editing XML, XHTML, and CSS
files.
| | 02:11 |
That's Notepad++, Oxygen XML Editor, and
Oxygen XML Author.
| | 02:18 |
Let's first take a look at Notepad++.
It's not only an excellent editor, it's
| | 02:23 |
also free.
All right, click the icon.
| | 02:25 |
And once again, from the Open With menu,
I'll choose Notepad++ this time.
| | 02:31 |
Notice that the markup is color-coded, so
now you can easily differentiate between
| | 02:36 |
the markup and the actual content of the
eBook.
| | 02:40 |
With such an editor, it's must easier to
edit contents of an EPUB file.
| | 02:44 |
I'll go ahead and make a change to some
of the text here.
| | 02:47 |
I'll just change the word part to
chapter.
| | 02:50 |
And I'll save the file by clicking the
disk icon up here.
| | 02:55 |
I'll go ahead and close this file.
And I'll go back to the WinZip file.
| | 03:00 |
As soon as I click back on WinZip I'm
asked the following question, what would
| | 03:04 |
you like to do with this file.
And what I want to do is update the zip
| | 03:09 |
file with the change that I made.
I'll go ahead and click that option and
| | 03:14 |
now I've updated my EPUB file.
I can close this window and double-click
| | 03:19 |
my eBook.
And as you can see, the word part was
| | 03:22 |
changed to chapter.
So that's how easy it is to edit an EPUB file.
| | 03:28 |
To find out more information about
Notepad++ and to download the
| | 03:33 |
application, visit their website at
notepad-plus-plus.org.
| | 03:40 |
Now another application that you can use
to edit the contents of an EPUB file is
| | 03:44 |
the Oxygen XML Editor, so let's find out
what this same chapter looks like inside
| | 03:49 |
of Oxygen.
Once again, I'll drag my eBook icon on
| | 03:54 |
top of the WinZip icon to open it up,
navigate to the OEBPS folder and view
| | 03:59 |
this as a list.
And from the Open With menu, I'll choose
| | 04:05 |
Oxygen XML Editor.
But before I do, let me explain something
| | 04:09 |
that's very important to keep in mind.
When opening up a file that's inside of
| | 04:13 |
an EPUB package, it's really important
that you always right-click the file to
| | 04:17 |
open it, as I'm doing now.
If you instead drag the file icon to one
| | 04:22 |
of the application icons on the desktop,
a temporary copy of the file is made.
| | 04:28 |
So when you save it, the file within the
EPUB archive isn't actually updated, and
| | 04:32 |
you won't have updated your EPUB file.
So by right-clicking the file and
| | 04:37 |
choosing an application from this Open
With menu, you're directly opening the file.
| | 04:42 |
So, that way when you save the file after
modifying it, the file within the archive
| | 04:47 |
is actually updated.
All right, let's open this up into Oxygen.
| | 04:51 |
Notice here that the markup is also
color-coded.
| | 04:55 |
Now Oxygen is professional tool for
editing XML files, and it can do much,
| | 04:59 |
much more than that, and it's probably a
bit overkill for your needs.
| | 05:04 |
So the same company who creates Oxygen,
Syncrosoft also offers a lighter version
| | 05:09 |
of this same editor called Author XML
Editor.
| | 05:13 |
It's really a less expensive alternative
and it works just as good as Oxygen when
| | 05:17 |
it comes to editing EPUB files.
So I'll open up this same chapter inside
| | 05:22 |
of Author.
Again the mark if it's color coded, and
| | 05:25 |
I've also noticed that the interface
looks very similar with many of the same
| | 05:29 |
tools as Oxygen.
Now, another application that you can use
| | 05:33 |
for editing the contents of an EPUB file
is Adobe Dreamweaver.
| | 05:38 |
Which you probably already have if you've
installed the right version of the
| | 05:41 |
Creative Suite.
It's a dedicated HTML editor so it'll
| | 05:45 |
work really well for editing EPUB files.
However, if you're serious about eBook
| | 05:50 |
production, and you plan on creating a
lot of eBooks, I highly recommend a more
| | 05:54 |
professional tool such as Oxygen XML
Editor or Author XML Editor.
| | 06:00 |
So what makes the oxygen or other XML
editors, the most professional choice for
| | 06:04 |
editing EPUB files?
Well, either one of these editors can
| | 06:09 |
directly open AN EPUB file, so you don't
have to first use a zip utility to open
| | 06:13 |
up the EPUB file before editing its
components.
| | 06:18 |
Let me show you how to open an EPUB file
directly using Oxygen XML Author.
| | 06:23 |
I'll go ahead and close this document,
and from the Perspective menu, I'll
| | 06:27 |
choose Show View, and then Archive
Browser.
| | 06:31 |
This opens up the Archive Browser panel,
and from this panel, I can directly open
| | 06:36 |
an EPUB file.
Since an EPUB file is just an archive,
| | 06:40 |
I'll click the Open Archive button,
navigate to the desktop, select my EPUB
| | 06:45 |
file, and open it.
And there it is.
| | 06:50 |
Now we're looking at the components of
that EPUB file.
| | 06:52 |
Within the OEBPS folder, I can see all of
the XHTML files.
| | 06:57 |
To edit one of these, all I have to do is
double-click it.
| | 07:01 |
That opens up the file right within the
main content window.
| | 07:05 |
I can scroll over and make a change to
the text.
| | 07:09 |
So, this time, I'll change the word
chapter back to part.
| | 07:13 |
To save the file, I'll just click this
save icon up here.
| | 07:17 |
Now, the first time you save a file, you
are asked if you'd like to back it up or not.
| | 07:22 |
I definitely don't want to back up the
file.
| | 07:24 |
And I'll just click never ask me again,
and click OK.
| | 07:27 |
So the file was saved, right within the
archive.
| | 07:31 |
So now I can open it to see the results.
I'll minimize this window, and
| | 07:35 |
double-click the eBook to open it back
up.
| | 07:40 |
And as you can see the word chapter was
changed back to part.
| | 07:44 |
With this level of productivity it's
definitely worth your investment in this program.
| | 07:49 |
You can find out more about Oxygen and
Author by visiting their website at www.oxygenxml.com.
| | 07:57 |
All right, so now you know how to edit an
EPUB file on the Windows operating system.
| | 08:04 |
As you can see, there are several ways to
both open and edit an EPUB file.
| | 08:09 |
If you're serious about eBook production,
I wouldn't settle for anything less than
| | 08:15 |
a great XML editor.
| | 08:18 |
| | Collapse this transcript |
|
|
3. Page LayoutMaster pages, page breaks, and page numbers| 00:02 |
In this lesson, I'm going to explain what
happens to master pages, page breaks, and
| | 00:06 |
page numbers when you export an EPUB file
from InDesign.
| | 00:11 |
It's important to understand that the
EPUB file format does not define page structure.
| | 00:15 |
It was specifically designed to allow
content to adapt to the various screen
| | 00:19 |
sizes of different e-book readers.
So, the visual layout of an e-book will
| | 00:25 |
actually change depending which reading
devise you have it opened on.
| | 00:29 |
Now, Indesign is a page layout
application.
| | 00:32 |
It was originally designed to create
professional looking publications for print.
| | 00:37 |
And now, we're trying to convert a
print-ready document into an e-book.
| | 00:41 |
So when you export an EPUB file from
InDesign, you're essentially sending the
| | 00:45 |
document through a giant sifter in order
to filter out all the unnecessary
| | 00:49 |
components and create a dumbed-down
version of the same publication that's
| | 00:53 |
accessible to a wind range of e-book
readers.
| | 00:59 |
So, which layout components get filtered
out when you create an EPUB file?
| | 01:04 |
For one, the actual page size of your
document is completely ignored.
| | 01:09 |
Your carefully set up margins and columns
are ignored and all the master page items
| | 01:13 |
and automatic page numbers are ignored as
well.
| | 01:17 |
In addition, InDesign completely
disregards the way your text is laid out
| | 01:21 |
from page to page.
Even all your carefully inserted page
| | 01:25 |
breaks get discarded.
As a result, all the content of your EPUB
| | 01:30 |
file flows together in a single,
continuous linear flow.
| | 01:35 |
Let me show you what I mean.
Notice that the running headers on this
| | 01:39 |
page are master items.
I can see that, because the frames have
| | 01:44 |
dotted borders.
At the bottom of each page is an
| | 01:47 |
automatic page number.
These were inserted by going to the Type
| | 01:52 |
menu, choosing Insert Special Characters
> Markers, and then current page number.
| | 01:58 |
Now, if you've manually typed in the page
numbers, they'll definitely show up in
| | 02:02 |
the e-book.
But of course, if you've placed those
| | 02:06 |
manually created page numbers on a master
page, they won't show up in the e-book.
| | 02:11 |
I'd also like you to notice how the text
is laid out from page to page.
| | 02:16 |
All the text frames are actually linked
together as a single story.
| | 02:21 |
So, in order to force page breaks, I've
inserted forced page break characters,
| | 02:25 |
and that's what this character is here.
This forces the text to jump to the top
| | 02:31 |
of the next page, and in this case, that
allows Chapter One to start here, but
| | 02:35 |
these page breaks are ignored.
So let's see what happens when I export
| | 02:41 |
this file as an EPUB file.
I go up to the File menu and choose
| | 02:46 |
Export for and then EPUB.
I'll just send this to the Desktop and
| | 02:51 |
click Save.
Now, all of these options have been set
| | 02:54 |
up properly for me already, so I'll just
go ahead and click Export.
| | 02:59 |
And here is my e-book.
Notice that the running headers which
| | 03:08 |
were master page items were ignored.
That's a good thing though, because EPUB
| | 03:13 |
files don't define page structure, and if
master items were included in an EPUB
| | 03:17 |
file, you wouldn't be able to control
their position on the page.
| | 03:22 |
They would just flow right along with the
rest of the text.
| | 03:25 |
Now, some e-book readers such as the
Apple iPad will actually display running
| | 03:29 |
headers for you.
But the e-book reader gets this
| | 03:32 |
information from the metadata within the
e-book.
| | 03:36 |
Also notice that there are no page
numbers in my e-book and this is a good
| | 03:39 |
thing as well.
Because the content of an eBook will
| | 03:43 |
adapt to the reading device that you read
it on, which makes it impossible to
| | 03:46 |
predict where the pages will begin and
end.
| | 03:50 |
Many eBook readers will actually add the
pages numbers for you.
| | 03:54 |
They'll even recalculate the page numbers
after you've resized the text or chosen a
| | 03:58 |
different font.
I'd also like you to notice how all the
| | 04:02 |
content flows together in one continuous
flow.
| | 04:07 |
In other words, the way in which my pages
were laid out in InDesign was ignored and
| | 04:12 |
all the page breaks were discarded.
So, notice the chapter headings start
| | 04:18 |
immediately below the end of the text in
the preceding chapter.
| | 04:23 |
Fortunately, there are two ways to force
chapters to break property so that they
| | 04:27 |
always start at the top of a new page.
If you're using InDesign CS4, you can
| | 04:33 |
create a separate InDesign document for
each chapter, and then, add all the
| | 04:37 |
chapters together in an InDesign book
file.
| | 04:41 |
This also works the same way in InDesign
CS5.
| | 04:44 |
But, with CS5, there is another way to
create forced chapter breaks in an EPUB file.
| | 04:52 |
You can use the First Level Entries and
in TOC style to create the chapter
| | 04:55 |
breaks, and then, when you export the
EPUB file, make sure and check the
| | 04:59 |
correct option.
So, in InDesign CS5, I'll show you where
| | 05:05 |
that option is found.
It's in the Contents section of the
| | 05:13 |
dialog box, and you'll want to check use
First Level Entries as Chapter Breaks.
| | 05:19 |
So let's take a look at an EPUB file that
has proper chapter breaks.
| | 05:24 |
I'll hide InDesign.
And on the Desktop is my sample e-book.
| | 05:35 |
So this e-book has proper chapter breaks.
As you can see here, the first section
| | 05:40 |
ends, no more text is allowed to fill
this space, and then, the next chapter
| | 05:44 |
starts at the top of the next page.
Once again, at the end of Chapter One, a
| | 05:52 |
little extra space is down here, and
then, Chapter Two is forced to start the
| | 05:57 |
next page.
If I decrease the size of the window, you
| | 06:04 |
can see that that space is still there
and it's kept.
| | 06:09 |
It's preserved in the EPUB file that way.
Let's take a look at how the same e-book
| | 06:14 |
looks on the Apple iPad.
I've created a couple screen shots here.
| | 06:19 |
So here, you can see in this layout,
Chapter Two ends on the left-facing page
| | 06:23 |
and Chapter Three is forced to start at
the top of the right-facing page.
| | 06:29 |
And the same goes for this (UNKNOWN) as
well.
| | 06:32 |
When using either of the two methods I
just explained for creating forced
| | 06:36 |
chapter breaks, a separate XHTML file is
created for each chapter within the e-book.
| | 06:43 |
So, when an e-book reader encounters a
new XHTML file, it always loads it as a
| | 06:48 |
new page.
So, now you have a better understanding
| | 06:52 |
of how an InDesign file is converted to
an EPUB file.
| | 06:56 |
And you know that certain things just
don't get exported such as master items,
| | 07:00 |
page numbers, and the page structure of a
document.
| | 07:04 |
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Using a book file to create chapter breaks| 00:02 |
In this lesson, you'll learn how to set
up an InDesign Book file in order to
| | 00:05 |
create chapter breaks in an eBook.
And this is important because an eBook
| | 00:10 |
with logical chapter breaks, helps to
create a good reading experience.
| | 00:14 |
The eBook that we're looking at now
contains proper chapter breaks.
| | 00:18 |
The content for section one ends before
it reaches the bottom of the page, which
| | 00:23 |
leave some white space at the bottom, and
chapter one starts at the top of the next page.
| | 00:30 |
Now let's take a look at this same eBook,
only without proper chapter breaks.
| | 00:38 |
And as you can see, all the content flows
together in one continuous stream,
| | 00:42 |
creating a poor reading experience.
So, now let me show you how to create
| | 00:48 |
chapter breaks in an EPUB file.
Keep in mind that the method I’m about to
| | 00:53 |
show you, works with both InDesign CS4
and InDesign CS5.
| | 00:57 |
I’ll go ahead and open my InDesign
document.
| | 01:02 |
When I initially laid out this book, I
set it all up within a single InDesign document.
| | 01:08 |
So, if I export the file as it is, the
chapter breaks will not be maintained in
| | 01:12 |
my EPUB file.
It will end up with an eBook that has no
| | 01:16 |
chapter breaks.
So, in order to create the chapter
| | 01:20 |
breaks, I need to first create a separate
Indesign document for each chapter and
| | 01:24 |
section of my book.
Then I need to collect all of those
| | 01:28 |
documents together into a single InDesign
Book file so that they are treated as a
| | 01:32 |
single publication.
Now, there are different ways to break up
| | 01:37 |
a document into multiple documents, but
here's the method that I prefer because
| | 01:41 |
it's clean and fairly simple.
The first thing I'll do is a save a copy
| | 01:46 |
of this publication, as an InDesign
template file.
| | 01:51 |
I'll choose File, and then Save As.
I'll send this to the desktop, and for
| | 01:55 |
the file format, I want to make sure and
specify the InDesign CS5, or if you're
| | 01:59 |
working with InDesign CS4, the InDesign
CS4 template format.
| | 02:08 |
Notice the file extension ends with INDT,
which stands for InDesign template.
| | 02:15 |
I'll save that, and that's the document
that I now have open.
| | 02:20 |
So, now I need to select all of the pages
in the Pages panel.
| | 02:27 |
I'll select the first page, too.
You can't actually delete all the pages,
| | 02:31 |
there has to be at least one page left in
the Pages panel.
| | 02:35 |
So, I'll select page two, scroll to the
bottom, while holding the Shift key I'll
| | 02:40 |
click page 26, so that selects all of the
other pages in between.
| | 02:45 |
And then I'll click the Trash icon to
delete all the pages.
| | 02:51 |
And now that all of the pages are
deleted, I'll go ahead and remove the
| | 02:54 |
content from page one.
I'll choose Edit > Select All and then
| | 03:00 |
press Delete or Backspace, I'll go ahead
and save this, and now I can close this file.
| | 03:09 |
So, this first step creates a template
and insures that of the paragraphing
| | 03:13 |
character styles, master pages.
The TOC style, and all other document
| | 03:19 |
elements are available in each document
that makes up my publication.
| | 03:24 |
So, the next step is to open up the
template.
| | 03:28 |
I'll choose File > Open, navigate to find
my template document, and click Open.
| | 03:36 |
Notice that this opens a new untitled
copy, that's based on the original
| | 03:40 |
template file.
Now I'm going to open up my original publication.
| | 03:50 |
And I'm going to place both of these
documents side by side.
| | 03:54 |
You can do that by clicking on this icon
here in the Application bar.
| | 03:59 |
This is the Arranged Documents icon.
From this menu, I'll choose the Two Up option.
| | 04:05 |
That places the documents side by side.
So, now all I need to do is select the
| | 04:10 |
pages that I want to create a separate
document out of.
| | 04:15 |
Into my untitled document.
I'll start with the cover since the cover
| | 04:19 |
should always be in it's own InDesign
document.
| | 04:22 |
I'll drag the cover page icon over to the
top of the untitled document and release
| | 04:26 |
the mouse button.
And then I'm asked how I would like that
| | 04:31 |
page to be inserted.
I'd like to insert it at the start of the
| | 04:35 |
document and then click OK.
Now, I'll switch over to that document
| | 04:41 |
and notice that that page was added to
the beginning of the document, so now I
| | 04:45 |
can select this last page and delete it.
Now, I need to save this document.
| | 04:52 |
I'll choose Cmd+S or that's Ctrl+S on the
PC.
| | 04:56 |
I also need to create a new folder, which
will contain all of the components of my publication.
| | 05:02 |
To do that, I'll just click this New
Folder icon, and I'll call this my eBook
| | 05:06 |
publication, and click Create.
And now I'll name this document.
| | 05:12 |
Now this is the cover document, and it's
the first document in the publication, so
| | 05:17 |
I'm going to precede the file name with a
number.
| | 05:21 |
This'll make it easier to add the
documents to the Book file, and it'll
| | 05:24 |
keep all of the documents in the right
order.
| | 05:28 |
Okay, I'll go ahead and save this.
Now I'm going to create another untitled
| | 05:32 |
document, based on that template.
Choose File > Open, select My Template
| | 05:38 |
Document, open that.
Again a new untitled original based on
| | 05:43 |
the template is created.
I'll switch back over to my main
| | 05:47 |
document, and now I need to select the
next page or pages that should comprise
| | 05:52 |
the next section of my document.
And in this case, it's a little difficult
| | 05:59 |
to see these thumbnails In the Pages
panel, so it's also difficult to know
| | 06:03 |
what belongs on each page.
So, here's a little tip for you.
| | 06:09 |
From the pages panel menu, choose Panel
Options, and I can make the page
| | 06:14 |
thumbnails much bigger by simply choosing
from this size menu, a larger size.
| | 06:21 |
So, I'll choose large and click OK.
That makes it a little easier to see
| | 06:26 |
what's on each page.
I can make those thumbnails even bigger.
| | 06:31 |
Oh, and that's much easier.
So, now I can see by looking at this page
| | 06:34 |
icon, that this is the table of contents.
I want that to appear on its own page in
| | 06:40 |
the eBook, so I'll drag just this page
icon over, insert it at the start of the
| | 06:45 |
document, click OK and now I'll save
this.
| | 06:50 |
Actually, I'll go ahead and delete this
extra, unnecessary page.
| | 06:55 |
I'll just drag it to the Trash icon at
the bottom of the Pages panel and now
| | 06:58 |
I'll save this document.
This is two contents.
| | 07:05 |
Alright, let's repeat that process one
more time.
| | 07:09 |
From the File menu I'll choose > Open.
Locate my InDesign template document.
| | 07:17 |
That makes a new untitled original from
my original document, I'll select the
| | 07:23 |
first section.
So, section one should be on its own page
| | 07:28 |
in the eBook.
Again, I'll just drag that over.
| | 07:32 |
However, if I wanted to drag an entire
chapter, I could do that as well.
| | 07:37 |
So, let's say that I'm ready to drag over
chapter one.
| | 07:40 |
I would just click the first page icon
for that chapter.
| | 07:44 |
Navigate to the bottom or to the last
page of that chapter.
| | 07:48 |
Shift+click that page icon to select all
the pages in that chapter.
| | 07:53 |
And then when I drag this over, InDesign
will copy all the pages into my new
| | 07:57 |
untitled document.
All I need to do now is delete this last page.
| | 08:06 |
Now to save time, I've already divided
this document up into multiple documents,
| | 08:11 |
so I'll go ahead and hide InDesign for a
moment.
| | 08:15 |
And all of my documents are contained
within this folder here.
| | 08:22 |
So, the next step is to create an
InDesign Book file, and collect all of
| | 08:26 |
these documents together into that Book
file.
| | 08:31 |
To create an InDesign Book file, go to
the File menu, choose New, and then Book.
| | 08:39 |
You'll want to select a location for your
book.
| | 08:43 |
To do that, I'll just select a folder,
that I want to add it to.
| | 08:47 |
And I'll call this my sample book, save
it within this folder.
| | 08:54 |
And I get a new panel, now I need to add
all those documents I created earlier, to
| | 08:58 |
this panel, by clicking the plus sign at
the bottom of the panel.
| | 09:06 |
Here's the folder with all those
documents.
| | 09:08 |
I'll select the first one and while
holding the Shift key, I'll select the
| | 09:11 |
last one.
That selects all the documents.
| | 09:15 |
Now I can click Open and they're being
added to the Book file.
| | 09:18 |
I'll just go ahead and click the Save
icon to save the book.
| | 09:22 |
And now I'm ready to export the EPUB
file.
| | 09:26 |
From my Book file.
To do that, go to the Book panel menu,
| | 09:30 |
and choose export book to EPUB, this will
export the entire book as a single publication.
| | 09:38 |
I'll just go ahead and send this to the
desktop.
| | 09:43 |
And now I can click Save.
I'll make sure and select this option so
| | 09:47 |
that I can view the eBook after exporting
it.
| | 09:51 |
And I'd like my images to have a higher
quality, so from the Image Quality menu,
| | 09:55 |
I'll choose High.
And then in the Content section I need to
| | 10:00 |
specify a few options as well.
I want to generate a table of contents,
| | 10:05 |
so I'll include the InDesign TOC style
that I've created.
| | 10:11 |
It's called navigation guide, and I want
to suppress those automatic entries, so
| | 10:15 |
that the document names themselves don't
appear within my table of contents.
| | 10:21 |
I also want to include the style
definitions, but I don't want to preserve
| | 10:25 |
any local overrides, and I definitely
don't want to include the embeddable fonts.
| | 10:31 |
Because I have no idea which eBook reader
my eBook will end up on, and, again, not
| | 10:35 |
all eBook readers support embedded fonts.
All right, I'll click Export.
| | 10:43 |
When you export an EPUB document from a
Book file, each chapter is converted into
| | 10:47 |
a separate XHTML file within the EPUB
document.
| | 10:52 |
Then, when an eBook reader encounters a
new XHTML file as you're flipping through
| | 10:58 |
the pages, It always loads that new file,
as a new page in the eBook reader.
| | 11:04 |
This is especially important for long or
complex eBooks, because the pages render
| | 11:09 |
faster in an eBook reader when an eBook
is made up of several XHTML files.
| | 11:15 |
So, here's the final eBook.
Here's the Table of Contents.
| | 11:19 |
If I click in Section One and then
navigate upward, you can see that some
| | 11:23 |
blank space was left at the bottom of the
contents page because it's in its own page.
| | 11:31 |
Going to the next page here at the end of
section one and and the beginning if
| | 11:35 |
chapter one.
So, the page breaks work.
| | 11:39 |
So, that's how you use an InDesign Book
file to create chapter breaks in an EPUB file.
| | 11:46 |
This method offers you complete control
over chapter breaks, but at the same time
| | 11:50 |
it can be quite time consuming to break
up a document into separate documents.
| | 11:55 |
Especially if you're working with a very
large document, but the results are
| | 11:59 |
definitely worth the time and effort, in
my opinion.
| | 12:03 |
So, if your entire publication has been
set up within a single InDesign document,
| | 12:07 |
and you have InDesign CS5, there's an
alternative method for you.
| | 12:13 |
You can take advantage of the new Export
feature, which references the first level
| | 12:17 |
entries in a TOC style, in order to
create the chapter breaks.
| | 12:22 |
However, if you're working with a
publication that's already been set up
| | 12:26 |
using a Book file.
Then you might as well take advantage of
| | 12:29 |
it and just export your EPUB file from
that Book file.
| | 12:33 |
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Using first-level TOC entries in InDesign CS5 to create chapter breaks| 00:02 |
In this lesson, I'm going to demonstrate
how to create Chapter Breaks in an e-book
| | 00:06 |
using an amazing and time-saving feature
that's available in InDesign CS5.
| | 00:12 |
It is possible to create Chapter Breaks
in an e-book by setting up an InDesign
| | 00:16 |
Book file and exporting the EPUB file
from it.
| | 00:20 |
But this method can be tedious and time
consuming especially when working with
| | 00:24 |
large documents.
So, an alternative method for creating
| | 00:29 |
Chapter Breaks is to use a special export
option that's available in InDesign CS5.
| | 00:35 |
When I laid out this book, I set it all
up within a single InDesign document.
| | 00:41 |
I also consistently applied specific
paragraph styles to all the main chapter
| | 00:45 |
headings, and section headings.
On this spread, you can see that I've
| | 00:52 |
applied the section title style to the
section one heading.
| | 00:59 |
And since this graphic is an anchored
object, I applied a style to the
| | 01:03 |
paragraph in which it's anchored.
It's called section opener icon.
| | 01:09 |
This way, I could center the graphic
within the text frame, and add space
| | 01:13 |
below it.
On the next page, you can see that I
| | 01:17 |
applied the chapter number style and the
chapter name style to all of my chapter headings.
| | 01:24 |
So since I've consistently applied these
paragraph styles to all the main headings
| | 01:28 |
in my book.
I can reference them with a TOC style.
| | 01:32 |
Now, a TOC style is normally used to
create an automatic table of contents.
| | 01:38 |
But in this case I'm going to use it to
create the navigation guide in my e-book
| | 01:42 |
and at the same time I'm going to use it
to create the Chapter Breaks.
| | 01:48 |
I've already set up the TOC style.
Let me show how I set it up.
| | 01:53 |
From the Layout menu, I'll choose Table
of Contents styles and here is the style
| | 01:57 |
that I created, called Navigation Guide.
I'll double-click that to edit it.
| | 02:04 |
So here are the settings from my TOC
style.
| | 02:07 |
Notice that I've included just two
paragraph styles.
| | 02:11 |
Section Title which is applied to the
section heading text and Chapter Name
| | 02:15 |
which is applied to the name of each
chapter.
| | 02:19 |
And then, also, notice that both of these
styles have been set up as Level 1 entries.
| | 02:25 |
InDesign will only create the Chapter
Breaks out of the Level 1 entries and the
| | 02:28 |
TOC style, so make sure that they've been
set up that way.
| | 02:34 |
If there were a Level 2 entry, it would
be indented like you see here.
| | 02:39 |
So, when i export this document as an
EPUB file with the right export option selected.
| | 02:45 |
InDesign will locate all the paragraphs
that either have the section title or
| | 02:50 |
chapter name style applied and create a
new XHTML document for each section and
| | 02:56 |
chapter found.
Then, when you open the EPUB file, each
| | 03:02 |
time the e-book reader encounters a new
XHTML file.
| | 03:06 |
As you scroll through the pages, the
content will be loaded at the start of a
| | 03:09 |
new page.
Alright.
| | 03:12 |
So with the TOC style set up, I'm now
ready to export my document.
| | 03:17 |
I'll go ahead and cancel these dialog
boxes, and from the File menu, I'll
| | 03:22 |
choose Export For, and then EPUB.
I'll send this to the Desktop.
| | 03:28 |
I'll go ahead and overwrite the other
EPUB file with the same name.
| | 03:33 |
Now, in order for this to work properly,
I have to specify the right export options.
| | 03:38 |
And in this case, the options that I need
to work with, are located in the Content Section.
| | 03:43 |
So the first option that I need to turn
on is include InDesign, TOC entries.
| | 03:49 |
That way I can access the TOC style that
I've set up.
| | 03:53 |
I want to reference this specific TOC
style, the navigation guide style that I
| | 03:57 |
had set up.
And we were looking at, just a moment ago.
| | 04:02 |
And then, I also want to make sure to
suppress the automatic entries for the
| | 04:05 |
document names.
So that the names of my documents don't
| | 04:09 |
appear in my Navigation Guide as well.
And then, this is the special option
| | 04:14 |
that's available in InDesign CS5, use
first level entries as Chapter Breaks.
| | 04:20 |
This is that option that will create
Chapter Breaks in the EPUB file.
| | 04:25 |
So with these options properly selected
I'll export to EPUB file and here's my e-book.
| | 04:34 |
Notice that the table of contents or
navigation guide over here on the left
| | 04:38 |
was properly generated.
But there is one problem with my document.
| | 04:47 |
Notice that chapter 2 starts with the
actual name of the chapter and the
| | 04:51 |
chapter number was left behind at the end
of the preceding chapter.
| | 04:57 |
If you recall in my InDesign document, I
set up the TOC style to reference the
| | 05:01 |
section title and chapter name styles
which are applied to the section name and
| | 05:06 |
chapter name; however, my chapters don't
start with this text.
| | 05:13 |
My chapters start with the page number.
And my sections start with this graphic.
| | 05:20 |
But if I go back to update my TOC style
in order to reference the paragraph style
| | 05:24 |
thats applied to this graphic.
And the paragraph style that's applied to
| | 05:30 |
the chapter number the table of contents
in my ebook over here on the left won't
| | 05:34 |
properly be generated.
And let me show you what I mean.
| | 05:40 |
I'll go back to InDesign.
And to edit the TOC style, I'll go to the
| | 05:44 |
layout menu, and choose table of contents
styles.
| | 05:49 |
I'll double click this style to edit it.
And I'll remove both of these styles from
| | 05:54 |
this list.
And now, I'll reference the other two
| | 05:58 |
styles instead.
I want to reference the chapter number
| | 06:03 |
style, the style that's applied to the
actual number of the chapter.
| | 06:07 |
And I also want to reference the section
opener icon style.
| | 06:15 |
There it is.
I'll just add this as well.
| | 06:18 |
Now this is a level 2 item.
I want to make sure and convert this to a
| | 06:23 |
level 1 entry and now I can click okay.
That's all there is to it.
| | 06:28 |
I'll click okay once again and I'll
export the EPUB file.
| | 06:34 |
I'll go ahead and overwrite the
pre-existing file.
| | 06:38 |
These options have been remembered, so
I'll click Export.
| | 06:39 |
And if I scroll through this document,
this icon is now gone from the content section.
| | 06:41 |
And is appearing at the top of this
section, as it should.
| | 06:56 |
And chapter one number, is appearing at
the top of the chapter.
| | 07:00 |
So, now the chapters and sections are
breaking in the correct places, but
| | 07:04 |
notice what happened to my navigation
guide.
| | 07:09 |
It was created based on the wrong text.
Notice that a blank space appears where
| | 07:14 |
the section opener graphic was
referenced.
| | 07:17 |
And the chapter numbers are appearing.
So we have ourselves in a bit of a catch-22.
| | 07:24 |
So how are we going to work around this?
Well, I could just redesign the book.
| | 07:29 |
I could remove the graphic and the page
number at the start of each section and
| | 07:33 |
chapter, and instead start them with a
simple name.
| | 07:37 |
But I would rather keep the current
design, so to fix this, I'll have to
| | 07:41 |
re-export the EPUB file, with the
original settings that I had, and then
| | 07:45 |
edit the EPUB file with my XML Editor.
Let's do that.
| | 07:51 |
I'll go back to InDesign, from the File
menu, I'll choose Revert, this will
| | 07:55 |
revert the document to the last saved
original.
| | 08:00 |
And now, my table of contents style or
TOC style is referencing, once again, the
| | 08:05 |
section title and the chapter name.
So I'll export this.
| | 08:17 |
I'll go to the content section make sure
and include the In Design TOC entry
| | 08:22 |
suppress automatic entry for documents
and definately use the first level
| | 08:28 |
entries as Chapter Breaks and here is the
EPUB file.
| | 08:35 |
The navigation guide was created properly
but once again that icon is appearing in
| | 08:41 |
the incorrect position and the chapter
number is also not in the correct place.
| | 08:49 |
So I'll open this e-book up into Oxygen,
my favorite e-book editor.
| | 08:55 |
From the Archive Browser panel, I'll
click the Open Archive button, locate my
| | 08:59 |
EPUB file and open it.
Here are all the XHTML files that were generated.
| | 09:07 |
I'll open this one up and notice at the
bottom of this XHTML document is the
| | 09:12 |
section opener icon.
This shouldn't be here.
| | 09:17 |
So I need to select this entire div
element.
| | 09:20 |
I'll cut it, Command or Ctrl+X, I'll save
the file, and now I'll jump to the next
| | 09:25 |
XHTML file.
And I need to paste this at the start of
| | 09:31 |
this document and the beginning of all
the text is within this outermost development.
| | 09:40 |
I'll paste the div tag I just cut,
Command or Ctrl+V, and I'll save the div element.
| | 09:47 |
And at the bottom of all the content in
this XHTML file is the chapter number
| | 09:51 |
that shouldn't be along here.
I'll cut this, save the file, jump to the
| | 09:57 |
next XHTML file, and paste this above the
h1 or main heading, chapter 1.
| | 10:05 |
Save that and let's view the results of
my work Hide Oxygen.
| | 10:12 |
I'll also hide InDesign to get it out of
the way and I'll double click the EPUB
| | 10:18 |
file to open it up again.
That'll refresh it.
| | 10:24 |
If I now click on the Contents Entry,
that takes me to the Contents Page and
| | 10:28 |
the Graphic is no longer here.
It now appears in the correct position at
| | 10:33 |
the top of section one and the chapter
number appears in the correct position here.
| | 10:41 |
So as you can see, referencing the First
Level Entries in a TOC style can really
| | 10:45 |
speed up the process of creating Chapter
Breaks in an EPUB file.
| | 10:51 |
And you've also learned, just how easy it
is to fix an ePUB file by editing the
| | 10:56 |
XHTML files within an XML editor.
This is a fix that I otherwise couldn't
| | 11:04 |
have done within InDesign.
| | 11:08 |
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Controlling the reading order of text and graphics| 00:02 |
In this lesson, you'll learn how to
control the reading order of text and
| | 00:05 |
graphics in an eBook.
Since the ePUB file format does not
| | 00:09 |
define page structure, the relative
position of all the design elements in
| | 00:12 |
your InDesign document, is discarded when
you export an ePUB file.
| | 00:18 |
And as a result, all the content flows in
a linear order.
| | 00:22 |
Let me show you what I mean.
This sample layout contains 4 colored shapes.
| | 00:28 |
Notice how they're arranged on the page.
When you export an ePUB file, InDesign
| | 00:32 |
exports the text and graphics, in the
order that they're arranged on the page,
| | 00:36 |
from the left to the right, then from the
top down.
| | 00:40 |
So knowing that, what order do you think
these shapes will appear in, within the
| | 00:44 |
ePUB file?
Well, shape number one is the left most
| | 00:47 |
object, shape number two is the next
object, three the next, and shape four is
| | 00:52 |
the right most object.
I'll go ahead and export the ePUB file.
| | 00:57 |
From File > Export For > ePub, I'll send
this to the Desktop and save it.
| | 01:03 |
And as you can see, the shapes now flow
in a linear direction with the leftmost
| | 01:09 |
shape at the top of the page in the
rightmost shape at the bottom.
| | 01:16 |
So, now let's see what happens if I
relocate the shapes on the page.
| | 01:20 |
I'll reposition shape 3 to the left of
shape 2.
| | 01:24 |
And then, I'll position shape 4 in that
same position but slightly below shape 3.
| | 01:31 |
I'll also line them up along their left
edges.
| | 01:33 |
I'll select both objects, and from the
Align panel, I'll click To align the left edges.
| | 01:40 |
So, now they share the same x position.
What order do you think the shapes will
| | 01:44 |
be in now?
Well, based on the fact that the objects
| | 01:47 |
are exported from left to right and then
from the top down, I would predict that
| | 01:51 |
shape one will appear first, then shape
three, then shape 4, since it's below
| | 01:55 |
shape 3 but on the same x position.
And then finally shape 2, since it's the
| | 02:02 |
rightmost object.
Well let's find out.
| | 02:05 |
I'll go ahead and export the ePUB file.
(BLANK_AUDIO) And that's exactly what happened.
| | 02:13 |
So, as you can see there are is a way to
predict the ordering which InDesign will
| | 02:17 |
export the text and graphic frames when
you export an ePUB file.
| | 02:22 |
All right, lets take a look at our real
world example.
| | 02:25 |
This is a multiple page document.
When exporting multiple pages to an EPUB
| | 02:29 |
file, InDesign exports them in the
correct order starting with page one.
| | 02:34 |
And then as each page is exported, the
left to right, top down rule, is applied
| | 02:38 |
to all the objects.
On page six, I have an image and a caption.
| | 02:44 |
The image frame has a text wrap applied
to it, and the caption frame does as well.
| | 02:49 |
So, this way, the text flows around them.
And then on page 13, there's another
| | 02:53 |
image and a caption.
And both of these frames have a Text Wrap
| | 02:57 |
applied to them as well.
So, what do you think will happen when I
| | 03:01 |
export this document as an ePUB file?
Where will the images and captions appear?
| | 03:06 |
Well, let's find out.
I'll go ahead and export the ePUB file.
| | 03:12 |
And I want to create chapter breaks.
So, from the Contents section, I'll
| | 03:16 |
select Use First Level Entries as chapter
breaks.
| | 03:22 |
Now, that leaf image should appear close
to the beginning of chapter one.
| | 03:27 |
But it's not, it should have appeared
somewhere in here, and that other image
| | 03:30 |
should have appeared close to the start
of chapter two.
| | 03:34 |
But it's nowhere to be found.
So where are they?
| | 03:38 |
Well if I scroll all the way to the
bottom of the document, I'll find them.
| | 03:43 |
And there they are, all decreased as size
of the text, so that I can fit both
| | 03:47 |
images on the same page.
And as you can see, they're definetely
| | 03:51 |
not in the correct position.
Also, notice, that the caption, for the
| | 03:55 |
Leaf image, is above the image, instead
of below it, like it should be.
| | 03:59 |
But why?
Well, let's go back to InDesign, and I'll
| | 04:01 |
explain why this is happening.
Well first of all, since all these text
| | 04:07 |
frames are linked together as a single
story, InDesign treats them as a single object.
| | 04:15 |
Since the first text frame of the story
is located at the very beginning of the
| | 04:18 |
document, this is the first object that's
exported.
| | 04:22 |
So that's why the images are appearing at
the end of all the text.
| | 04:26 |
So why did that caption appear above the
leaf image instead of below it?
| | 04:31 |
I'll go ahead and zoom in and we can find
out.
| | 04:33 |
If I take a real close look, notice that
the caption frame is positioned just
| | 04:37 |
slightly to the left of the image frame.
So that's why it's exporting first, and
| | 04:43 |
then appears above the image in the EPUB
file.
| | 04:47 |
Now I could fix all this by extending or
relocating the frames in the document but
| | 04:51 |
that will change my layout too much.
Though in order to control the exact
| | 04:56 |
position of the images and captions, I
need to anchor them within the main body
| | 05:00 |
of text so that they flow with the text
To create an anchored object select the
| | 05:04 |
object and then in this case I'll cut it
from the edit menu.
| | 05:11 |
I'll choose cut.
I'll move this caption frame out of the
| | 05:14 |
way and then you want to select a type
tool and position your cursor within the text.
| | 05:20 |
I'll enter an extra paragraph return.
That's where I would like to anchor the
| | 05:24 |
image and then I'll paste the image from
the edit menu.
| | 05:27 |
I'll choose paste.
So now the image is flowing within the text.
| | 05:32 |
If I were to insert some extra paragraph
returns, that forces the text down.
| | 05:38 |
And the image, since it anchored to that
paragraph within the text, moves with the text.
| | 05:45 |
So when I export this as an e-pub file,
the image will be located in that same position.
| | 05:51 |
Now the paragraph style thats currently
applied to the paragraph in which the
| | 05:55 |
image is anchored is the body text style
which applies an indent to it.
| | 06:01 |
So that's why you see the image indented.
I actually have another style to apply to
| | 06:05 |
the image.
And to apply it I'm going to click in the
| | 06:08 |
paragraph below and then with the arrow
key on my keyboard the up arrow key I'll
| | 06:12 |
press up once.
And that selects the paragraph, that the
| | 06:18 |
image is anchored within.
If you look very closely, you'll see a
| | 06:21 |
blinking cursor that's the height of the
image here on the left side.
| | 06:26 |
So with that paragraph selected, I can
apply the paragraph style that I've
| | 06:30 |
created for it, called image spacing
center.
| | 06:34 |
All right, I'll go ahead and zoom out a
bit, and let's place the caption text
| | 06:38 |
within the main body text as well, but
this time I'm going to select the text
| | 06:41 |
within the frame.
I'll just choose Cmd A or Ctrl A on the
| | 06:47 |
PC to select all the text, and then I'll
cut it, Cmd X or Ctrl X I can delete this
| | 06:52 |
frame, and now I'll paste that text above
this paragraph, but below the image.
| | 07:02 |
Now there's just a little too much space
above the caption, and that's happening
| | 07:05 |
because of the text wrap.
I don't need that text wrap anymore, so
| | 07:09 |
I'm going to turn it off.
I'll select the image And from the text
| | 07:12 |
wrap panel, I'll just turn that off.
And now, I'm noticing that there's just
| | 07:17 |
not enough space below the caption
itself, so to increase the amount of
| | 07:21 |
space here, I'll select this paragraph,
and I'll update the paragraph style
| | 07:26 |
caption, I'll double-click it, and from
the indents and spacing category, I'll
| | 07:30 |
add space above Or a space before of
about 12 points.
| | 07:37 |
And I'll even add a little space after.
That add space above and below the caption.
| | 07:44 |
I also would like to add a little bit
more space above the image.
| | 07:47 |
So to do that, I'll update the paragraph
style.
| | 07:50 |
This time, I'll right click the image
spacing paragraph.
| | 07:54 |
And from this menu, I'll choose edit.
And then the name of the style, go to the
| | 07:59 |
indents and spacing category, and apply
some space before.
| | 08:04 |
All right, that's looking much better.
Now here's one very important thing to
| | 08:08 |
keep in mind when anchoring graphics or
images within text.
| | 08:12 |
You need to use automatic leading.
Because if I were to update the paragraph
| | 08:18 |
style for the image spacing and apply a
fixed leading value, that is anything
| | 08:22 |
other than auto such as 14 points and
click okay, this is what's going to happen.
| | 08:30 |
So you need to use auto leading.
When you use auto leading.
| | 08:36 |
The leading value takes on the height of
the image.
| | 08:40 |
All right, so now that I've anchored this
image within the text, when I export the
| | 08:45 |
ePUB file, I can be sure that it will
appear in the correct position.
| | 08:54 |
And there it is, with the caption, notice
it's centered, there's space above and
| | 08:57 |
below it.
If I decrease the text size you can see
| | 09:01 |
that there's space below the caption as
well.
| | 09:05 |
So, now you understand how to control the
reading order of the text in graphics in
| | 09:08 |
an ePUB file.
For documents that have a relatively
| | 09:12 |
simple design, this method works quite
well.
| | 09:15 |
But as you can probably imagine trying to
convert a more complex layout in ePUB
| | 09:19 |
could take a lot of work.
Trying to maintain the correct order of
| | 09:24 |
everything could be challenging.
So, if you have InDesign CS5, there's an
| | 09:27 |
alternative method that you can use for
determining the reading order of the text
| | 09:31 |
and graphics.
With this method, you can actually leave
| | 09:35 |
the layout as it is.
And instead, tag everything with XML tags.
| | 09:40 |
Then the order of the XML tags determines
the reading order, of the text and
| | 09:44 |
graphics in the ePUB file instead of the
arrangement of the frames on the page.
| | 09:50 |
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Using XML structure in InDesign CS5 to control reading order| 00:02 |
One of the greatest challenges of eBook
production is converting a complex layout
| | 00:06 |
to a EPUB file.
The more complex the layout, the more
| | 00:10 |
challenging it can be to control the
reading order of all the texting graphics.
| | 00:15 |
In this lesson, I'm going to demonstrate
how to use the XML features in InDesign
| | 00:19 |
CS5, to control reading order, and as a
result speed up the conversion process.
| | 00:26 |
Let's say that you're working with a
document that contains a lot of sidebar
| | 00:29 |
elements that run along the outer edges
of each page.
| | 00:33 |
Somehow, you're going to need to specify
where you want them located in the EPUB file.
| | 00:37 |
Otherwise, they'll most certainly end up
on the wrong page.
| | 00:41 |
Within InDesign CS4, you would need to
anchor all the side bar elements within
| | 00:44 |
the main body of text in order to control
their position, which could be quite time consuming.
| | 00:51 |
But with InDesign CS5, you don't actually
have to modify your layout at all.
| | 00:56 |
Instead, you can label the elements in
your document with XML tags.
| | 01:00 |
And then InDesign can export the text,
and graphics, based on the order of the
| | 01:04 |
XML tags in the Structure pane.
You don't even have to know anything
| | 01:09 |
about XML to make this work.
So, let me show you how this works.
| | 01:13 |
This sample layout contains four colored
shapes.
| | 01:16 |
Also notice that they're numbered 1
through 4.
| | 01:19 |
Now, if I export this document using the
default Export settings, the objects will
| | 01:23 |
be exported from left to right and from
the top down.
| | 01:28 |
Knowing that, I can predict that shape 1
will appear first, followed by shape 3,
| | 01:33 |
then shape 4 and shape 2 will appear
last.
| | 01:38 |
I'll go ahead and export the EPUB file.
From the File menu, I'll choose Export 4
| | 01:44 |
and then EPUB.
I'll specify the Desktop and Save it, and
| | 01:48 |
Export it, and just as I predicted that's
how the shapes are ordered.
| | 01:54 |
So this time, instead of basing the
export order of the objects on their
| | 01:58 |
current position in the layout, I am
going to use XML tags.
| | 02:03 |
Let's say that in my eBook, I want the
shapes to appear in numerical order,
| | 02:08 |
starting with number 1 at the top, and
ending with 4 at the bottom.
| | 02:14 |
When I apply the tags, I want to apply
them in that order.
| | 02:18 |
Now, before I can apply the tags though,
I first need to create them.
| | 02:22 |
To create XML tags, you need to use the
Tags panel, which you can find by going
| | 02:27 |
to the Window menu, choosing Utilities
and then Tags.
| | 02:32 |
At the bottom of the Tags panel is the
Create New icon.
| | 02:36 |
Click that to create a new tag, and I'll
call this Graphic, since I'm going to
| | 02:40 |
apply it to my graphics.
I'll press Enter or Return to apply that.
| | 02:45 |
And now, I can apply this tag to each of
these four graphics.
| | 02:49 |
And I'll apply in the order that I want
them to be exported in.
| | 02:54 |
So, I'll select the first graphic.
And to apply the tag, I'll just click the
| | 02:57 |
name of the tag.
Select the second graphic, apply the tag.
| | 03:05 |
And now the tag has been applied to all
four graphics and I've explicitly
| | 03:09 |
identified them as XML elements, I can
now determine their export order by using
| | 03:14 |
the Structure pane.
I'll open the Structure pane by choosing
| | 03:20 |
View > Structure > Show Structure, the
Structure pane, displays all the XML
| | 03:24 |
elements in the document.
I'll click this triangle, in front of the
| | 03:29 |
root element, and notice that the graphic
element appears four times.
| | 03:34 |
One's for each shape that I assigned a
tag to.
| | 03:37 |
If I double- click an element, I can see
which shape it's applied to, because it's
| | 03:41 |
selected in the layout.
And if I select the shape on the page,
| | 03:45 |
its corresponding element is underlined
in the Structure pane.
| | 03:50 |
So, if I select the first shape, that's
the topmost element, the second shape is
| | 03:54 |
the second element, the third is the
third element, and the fourth shape is
| | 03:58 |
the last element.
So, when I export this document as an
| | 04:03 |
EPUB file, the shapes will appear in the
order in which they appear here in the
| | 04:07 |
Structure pane.
Alright I can export the EPUB file.
| | 04:17 |
I'll just overwrite the pre-existing EPUB
file.
| | 04:22 |
And now since this document contains XML
structure, this option, same as XML
| | 04:27 |
structure is available.
I'll go ahead and select it and click Export.
| | 04:34 |
And that worked.
As you can see, by tagging the elements
| | 04:37 |
and making sure that their position is
correct in this Structure pane.
| | 04:42 |
You can determine their reading order in
the EPUB file, without having to modify
| | 04:45 |
your original layout.
All right, let's take a look at a real
| | 04:50 |
world example.
I'll go ahead and close this file.
| | 04:55 |
This document contains a number of pages.
It contains a couple of sections, and
| | 05:00 |
several chapters of text.
It also contains a couple of images.
| | 05:04 |
On page six, I have an image that's
floating on the page.
| | 05:08 |
The caption below it is floating as well.
And a text wrap has been applied to both
| | 05:13 |
frames, so that the text flows around
them.
| | 05:16 |
Now, with InDesign CS4, I would have to
anchor the image and caption within the
| | 05:21 |
main body of text.
But now, I don't have to modify my layout
| | 05:25 |
at all, because I'm going to base the
reading order of the text and graphics,
| | 05:29 |
on the XML structure instead.
I'll open up the Structure pane.
| | 05:37 |
And as you can see by looking at the
Structure pane, there aren't any XML tags
| | 05:40 |
applied yet.
So, I need to do that first before
| | 05:44 |
exporting the EPUB file.
Now to expedite the tagging process, I'm
| | 05:49 |
going to take advantage of a very handy
feature called Map Styles to Tags, which
| | 05:54 |
can be found by going up to the Structure
pane menu.
| | 05:59 |
And choosing Map Styles to Tags.
This dialogue box lets you map XML tags
| | 06:04 |
to paragraph styles, so the text that's
using the paragraph styles gets tagged
| | 06:09 |
automatically for you.
This will save you a lot of time.
| | 06:15 |
Now, before we can use this feature, you
first need to apply paragraph styles to
| | 06:19 |
all your text.
Which you have to do anyway in order to
| | 06:22 |
format your text in the EPUB file, and
you also need to have create XML tags.
| | 06:28 |
This document doesn't contain any XML
tags so I'll create those first.
| | 06:33 |
I'll go ahead and cancel this.
We'll come back to this dialog box shortly.
| | 06:38 |
I'll hide the Pages panel, and here's the
Tags panel.
| | 06:41 |
So, I need to create tags, which will
correspond to each of the paragraph
| | 06:46 |
styles that I'm using in my layout.
Now, I don't need to create XML tags for
| | 06:52 |
all the paragraph styles in my document.
Only for those that are applied to the
| | 06:57 |
section headings, chapter headings, the
body text, and the image captions.
| | 07:02 |
So, I'll create a new tag for the section
title.
| | 07:06 |
To do that I'll click the create new icon
at the bottom of the Tags panel, and I'll
| | 07:10 |
call this section title.
Now watch what happens when I press
| | 07:14 |
Return or Enter.
I'm reminded that a tag name cannot
| | 07:19 |
contain spaces or tabs.
So, I'll rename this but this time, I'll
| | 07:24 |
include a hyphen where the space is in
the paragraph style name.
| | 07:30 |
And now I can apply that by pressing
Enter or Return.
| | 07:32 |
So, then I would go on to the next style.
If you want, you can also just edit a
| | 07:39 |
style, and copy it's name, Cmd or Ctrl C.
And then when you create the tag, it's
| | 07:46 |
easier just to paste that in, Cmd or Ctrl
V.
| | 07:49 |
Of course I do need to replace the spaces
with hyphens.
| | 07:54 |
So, I would just keep repeating this
process for all the paragraph styles that
| | 07:57 |
I want to apply tags to.
Now, to save time, I already created the
| | 08:03 |
tags and from the Tags panel menu, I
saved them.
| | 08:08 |
So, now all I have to do is load the
tags.
| | 08:11 |
They're located on my desktop, and it's
called XML tags.
| | 08:15 |
It's an XML file.
When I open this, it adds all the tags to
| | 08:19 |
the panel.
So, now that I have XML tags, I can now
| | 08:24 |
apply them to all the text and graphics
in my layout.
| | 08:29 |
I'm going to use the great feature, Map
Styles to Tags, in order to automate that process.
| | 08:36 |
From the Structure Pane menu, I'll choose
Map Styles to Tags, and I'll just go down
| | 08:41 |
this list.
I don't have to worry about the page
| | 08:45 |
number, or the running header, they're
not exported anyway.
| | 08:48 |
I'm not going to worry about the TOC
styles, but the section title needs to
| | 08:53 |
have the tag called Section Title applied
to it.
| | 08:58 |
Section Opener icon, as you can see it's
just a matter of going down this list and
| | 09:02 |
applying the correct tags to the correct
style, chapter number.
| | 09:08 |
Now, if the paragraph style names exactly
matched the names of your tags, all you
| | 09:13 |
would have to do is click Map by Name and
InDesign will automatically map the
| | 09:18 |
styles to the tags.
So you wouldn't have to go down this list
| | 09:24 |
and manually do it.
So, think about that the next time you
| | 09:27 |
set up an InDesign document, that you
know you're going to export as an EPUB file.
| | 09:32 |
Name your styles so that you can easily
map them to tags later on.
| | 09:39 |
You'll see why this is important here
shortly.
| | 09:42 |
Almost finished.
And I don't have to worry about the image
| | 09:49 |
spacing style because it's not even being
used in the document.
| | 09:53 |
I also don't need to worry about all the
character styles.
| | 09:56 |
All right.
I'll click OK.
| | 09:58 |
And now, InDesign has just mapped all the
styles to tags and in the Structure pane,
| | 10:03 |
you can see that.
Notice that four story elements were created.
| | 10:09 |
Let me zoom out and show you why that
happened.
| | 10:12 |
I'll double-click this story element to
find out which frame it is assigned to.
| | 10:18 |
Its assigned to all the text in the Table
of Contents frame.
| | 10:22 |
And this Table of Contents frame is not
connected to the main story.
| | 10:27 |
I'll switch over to Normal View mode, so
you can see the text threads.
| | 10:31 |
So, this is a separate story, that's why
it's appearing over here.
| | 10:35 |
Now, if I were to export this as an EPUB
file right now, the table of contents
| | 10:39 |
would end up below this story.
Which I just double-clicked, and can see
| | 10:44 |
that that's the main bulk of all the text
in my layout.
| | 10:48 |
So, we don't want that.
So, I need to reorder this element I need
| | 10:51 |
this story element which contains the
contents.
| | 10:55 |
And I need to drag this up soon as I see
the black line, I can let go of the mouse
| | 10:59 |
button and I've re-positioned it above
that story element.
| | 11:04 |
So, what are these two story elements?
I'll double-click to find out what
| | 11:07 |
they're applied to.
And they've been applied to the text
| | 11:12 |
within these caption frames.
Remember, these are floating frames and
| | 11:17 |
whenever InDesign encounters a frame,
InDesign applies the default story
| | 11:21 |
element or story tag to it.
So, this reminds me I actually need to
| | 11:27 |
apply image tags to my images.
I'll go ahead and find that tag.
| | 11:33 |
I know I created it.
There it is.
| | 11:35 |
So, with this graphic selected, I'll
apply image to it.
| | 11:38 |
That appears now in the Structure pane.
And there is another image on page thirteen.
| | 11:44 |
All right.
So, now what I want to do, is make sure
| | 11:48 |
that the caption appears properly below
the correct image.
| | 11:52 |
So, I'll double-click this story element
to find out what caption that is.
| | 11:57 |
That's the caption that belongs to the
leaf image.
| | 11:59 |
And the leaf image, if I select it,
that's this element here, which is underlined.
| | 12:04 |
So, that's the top story, I'll drag below
this image.
| | 12:08 |
And then that means that this story
element belongs to this image, and let's
| | 12:12 |
double-check my work.
I'll double-click this image and then
| | 12:15 |
double-click the story.
And that's correct.
| | 12:18 |
Now, If I were to export this as an EPUB
document right now, the images and their
| | 12:22 |
captions would appear at the very bottom
of all the text in the document.
| | 12:28 |
Because, they're located beneath the
story element in the Structure pane.
| | 12:33 |
So, I actually need to relocate these
image and story elements for the images
| | 12:37 |
and captions.
Within the main story element, which
| | 12:41 |
contains all of my text.
Notice that many of these element names
| | 12:47 |
are the same.
Section Intro is repeated many times.
| | 12:51 |
Body Text Indent, is repeated many times.
So how do you identify, one element from another?
| | 12:57 |
Of course, one way to do that is to
double-click the element.
| | 13:01 |
But without having to do that, you can
also show text snippets.
| | 13:04 |
And in quotes, you can see a little
snippet of the beginning of the text in
| | 13:08 |
that paragraph.
If you don't see the text snippets, you
| | 13:12 |
can turn them on by going to the
Structure Pane menu and choosing Show
| | 13:16 |
text snippets.
In my case, I'm already viewing them.
| | 13:21 |
So, what I need to do is zoom out.
And in my layout, identify the paragraph
| | 13:26 |
that this image and its caption should be
positioned near.
| | 13:31 |
So, I'll just click that paragraph in my
layout.
| | 13:35 |
And the corresponding element is
underlined for me.
| | 13:38 |
And here's the snippet of text.
Let's remember that, so keeping that
| | 13:42 |
snippet of text in mind, I'm going to
move down to the bottom of the structure,
| | 13:45 |
select the image.
And the caption together, holding the
| | 13:49 |
Shift key to select both of them.
Then I have to drag this up.
| | 13:55 |
And scroll to the top.
Here's chapter one, now I'm looking for
| | 13:58 |
that paragraph.
I'll position this just below that paragraph.
| | 14:04 |
So, it's not possible when using the XML
structure to determine the reading order
| | 14:08 |
of the text and graphics in an EPUB file.
It's not possible to place these image
| | 14:13 |
elements, within the text so it flows
between it like it is doing in the layout.
| | 14:20 |
This paragraph starts with three lines,
get broken up by the image and ends with
| | 14:23 |
two lines.
So, you can only do that by anchoring the
| | 14:27 |
graphic within the text.
Alright, so let's navigate to the next
| | 14:32 |
image and find out where it needs to be
located.
| | 14:36 |
It needs to be located after this
paragraph here.
| | 14:40 |
So, I'll click this paragraph to find out
where that is highlighted in the
| | 14:43 |
Structure pane.
There it is.
| | 14:46 |
Let's remember this snippet of text.
Of course, I'm using sample text.
| | 14:50 |
With real text, it would be much easier
to identify.
| | 14:54 |
I'll scroll to the bottom.
Select the image and its corresponding caption.
| | 14:59 |
Drag this up, and I'm looking for, here's
chapter four, here's chapter three, and
| | 15:04 |
here's chapter two, and I'll just drop
this about right here.
| | 15:09 |
Alright so now, the elements in the
Structure pane, have been properly ordered.
| | 15:15 |
I can now export the EPUB file.
Make sure that same as XML structure is
| | 15:22 |
selected, and then in the contents
section, I also want to make sure.
| | 15:27 |
And use the first level entries in my TOC
style as the basis for the chapter breaks.
| | 15:33 |
I'll click Export.
it appears that I've forgotten to tag the image.
| | 15:40 |
This is a very important lesson learned.
If you don't tag it, it won't get exported.
| | 15:46 |
But let's take a look.
Here's chapter one.
| | 15:49 |
The image appeared in the correct
position.
| | 15:54 |
And, if I scroll to chapter two, the
image appeared in the correct position
| | 15:59 |
here as well.
Alright, so let's go back to my layout,
| | 16:04 |
and tag the cover image so that it's
exported as well.
| | 16:11 |
With the Selection tool, select the
image, and apply the image tag.
| | 16:15 |
That sends it to the bottom of the
Structure pane, so I'm going to relocate
| | 16:18 |
it to the top.
All right, I'll go ahead and export the
| | 16:22 |
EPUB file.
All those options are still selected
| | 16:29 |
because InDesign remembers the last
selections that you made.
| | 16:35 |
And there it is, there is my eBook.
The cover page is there, and all the
| | 16:39 |
images are in the correct position.
So, as you can see, by basing the export
| | 16:44 |
order on the XML structure in your
document.
| | 16:48 |
It can be easier to control the reading
order of the text and graphics in an EPUB file.
| | 16:54 |
And, it's good to know that you have two
options for determining the reading order.
| | 16:58 |
| | Collapse this transcript |
|
|
4. Working with TextControlling formatting with paragraph and character styles| 00:02 |
In this lesson, you'll learn how to
control the formatting of an eBook with
| | 00:05 |
paragraph styles and character styles.
Now this is one of the most important
| | 00:11 |
steps in the eBook production workflow.
Because the styles that you apply
| | 00:15 |
identify the various text elements in
your document, and they're also converted
| | 00:20 |
to CSS styles.
And it's the CSS styles that determine
| | 00:25 |
the formatting of your text in an eBook.
Now, I've already consistently applied
| | 00:30 |
paragraph and character styles to all the
text in this document.
| | 00:34 |
To this first paragraph, I applied a
style called section opener icon, which
| | 00:38 |
centers this anchored graphic and adds a
little bit of space below it.
| | 00:43 |
To the chapter title, I applied a style
called chapter name, and to this block of
| | 00:48 |
italic text, I applied a style called
body text block.
| | 00:53 |
To the rest of the text in the chapter, I
applied a style called body text indent,
| | 00:57 |
which adds an indent to the first line of
each paragraph.
| | 01:01 |
I also applied a couple of character
styles.
| | 01:05 |
I applied the italic character style, to
any words that need to be italic.
| | 01:09 |
And, I applied the Bold character style
to any words that need to be bold.
| | 01:14 |
I'd also like to point out, that the size
of the body text font, is set at 12 points.
| | 01:22 |
And, this italic block of text, is also
set at 12 points.
| | 01:27 |
And the chapter title is set at 36
points.
| | 01:32 |
I purposefully chose these text sizes.
Because when the document is converted to
| | 01:37 |
an ePub file, 12 points is converted to 1
m unit in this CSS file.
| | 01:42 |
So that means that 36 points is converted
to three m units.
| | 01:47 |
Because it's three times larger.
So now I'll export the ePub file.
| | 01:51 |
From the File menu, I'll choose Export
For and then ePub.
| | 01:58 |
I also want to make sure that Include
Style Definitions is selected in the
| | 02:02 |
Contents section.
That way the paragraph styles are used to
| | 02:08 |
generate the CSS file in the ePub file.
But, I don't want to preserve any of the
| | 02:13 |
local overrides, even though this
document doesn't contain any.
| | 02:18 |
I also don't want to embed the fonts.
So I'll leave these two option deselected
| | 02:25 |
and click Export, and as you can see, my
eBook is formatted correctly.
| | 02:33 |
I'll decrease the text size so that you
can see more text on the page.
| | 02:37 |
And I'll narrow this window a little bit
to make it look a little bit more like a
| | 02:41 |
page in a book.
Now, the actual font that's used is not
| | 02:46 |
Minion Pro, because I didn't choose to
embed the fonts when I exported the ePub file.
| | 02:53 |
So the default font of Adobe Digital
Editions is being used instead.
| | 02:58 |
But the general formatting was preserved.
The size of the text was preserved, and
| | 03:04 |
the relationships between the different
text sizes was preserved.
| | 03:10 |
The graphic is properly centered, there's
space below it, there's space below the
| | 03:14 |
chapter title.
All the body text paragraphs have been
| | 03:19 |
indented, and the bold and italic words
were preserved as well.
| | 03:24 |
So the general formatting is preserved.
And now that I'm looking at this a little
| | 03:30 |
bit more closely.
I'm thinking that I'd like to add a
| | 03:33 |
little bit of space above the graphic in
order to add some more white space around
| | 03:37 |
the top of the page.
And to do that all I need to do is update
| | 03:43 |
the paragraph style in InDesign.
So I will go back to InDesign I will
| | 03:47 |
select this paragraph and I need to add
more space before it.
| | 03:52 |
I will double click the paragraph style
to edit it.
| | 03:55 |
Go to the indent and spacing category.
And I'll add a space before value of 36 points.
| | 04:03 |
And for this space after, I'll add a
little bit more as well.
| | 04:07 |
I'll make that 18 points.
And click OK.
| | 04:11 |
So now that I've redefined the style,
those new settings will be used to
| | 04:15 |
generate the CSS rule.
Within the CSS file.
| | 04:19 |
So from the File menu I'll export that
ePub file once again, overwriting the
| | 04:25 |
pre-existing file that already exists.
And there you can see that additional
| | 04:32 |
space was added above the graphic.
Now what's interesting to note is that
| | 04:39 |
when you add space before in InDesign
nothing is added at the top of a
| | 04:43 |
paragraph if it's at the top of a text
frame.
| | 04:48 |
But when the formatting is converted to a
CSS style, the space before is converted
| | 04:53 |
to a top margin value.
Now I'd also like to adjust the lighting
| | 04:58 |
within this block of italic text.
So again I'll go back to the InDesign
| | 05:04 |
document and I need to update the style.
So I'll double click body text block go
| | 05:10 |
to the basic character formats category
and instead of relying on the auto-lighting.
| | 05:19 |
I'll specify a lighting of 18 points.
That'll make it one and a half time the
| | 05:24 |
size of the text.
I'll click OK, and now I can export the
| | 05:30 |
ePub file again.
So as you can see this is really just a
| | 05:36 |
process of creating the ePub file, double
checking your work.
| | 05:41 |
And then modifying the paragraph styles.
Or even the character styles as necessary
| | 05:47 |
to control the formatting in your eBook.
So I can continue going back and forth
| | 05:53 |
quite a bit until I get a very nice
looking eBook design.
| | 05:57 |
Alright, so now that you understand how
paragraph and character styles are used
| | 06:01 |
to control the formatting of the text in
an eBook.
| | 06:06 |
I'd like to now crack open this ePub file
and show you just how the paragraph and
| | 06:10 |
character styles are converted to CSS
styles.
| | 06:14 |
I'll use the Oxygen XML editor to open it
up.
| | 06:18 |
At the top of the archive browser window,
I'll click the Open Archive button.
| | 06:23 |
Select my EPUB file, and open it up.
And then, within the OEBPS folder, I'll
| | 06:29 |
double click this CSS file to open it.
Notice that all the paragraphing
| | 06:35 |
character styles that we used in my
InDesign document.
| | 06:39 |
Have been converted to CSS styles.
So my main body text font, was converted
| | 06:45 |
to a CSS rule, called body text indent.
Notice that the name is the same, except
| | 06:51 |
that the spaces were replaced with
hyphens and now all the letters are in
| | 06:55 |
lower case.
This list of properties was derived from
| | 07:00 |
the paragraph style.
So notice that the font size is set at
| | 07:04 |
one m unit.
Which again is because my body text was
| | 07:08 |
set at 12 points in the InDesign file.
If you look at the chapter name, all the
| | 07:14 |
way at the top, the font size for the
chapter name is three m units.
| | 07:18 |
Which, once again, that's because the
chapter name was set at 36 points.
| | 07:23 |
Line hide is the letting value and its
measured in relationship to the font size.
| | 07:30 |
The text decoration property is often
used to apply things like underlines and
| | 07:34 |
line throughs which are called strike
throughs in InDesign.
| | 07:39 |
This particular paragraph style didn't
specify an underline or a strike through
| | 07:43 |
so that's why its value is none.
The font variant property is often used
| | 07:49 |
to apply small caps, and the text indent
is used to define the indent for the
| | 07:53 |
first line in each paragraph.
So, if I scroll back down to my body text
| | 08:00 |
indent style, you can see that a text
indent value has been applied.
| | 08:06 |
Because in my InDesign file, this
particular style had a text indent value
| | 08:11 |
of 18 points.
Which is equal to one and a half m units.
| | 08:16 |
And then the text align property is
pretty self explanatory.
| | 08:20 |
It'll either the left, right or center
align the text.
| | 08:25 |
So, here's the body text block, it would
actually centered, and here it is, using
| | 08:30 |
a value of center.
And then, notice, the font style, up
| | 08:35 |
here, has a value of italic.
The same is true for my italic character
| | 08:42 |
style, it's italic.
Its font weight is normal.
| | 08:48 |
However, for my bold character style, it
has a font weight of bold.
| | 08:53 |
Notice that when character styles are
converted to CSS rules.
| | 08:58 |
The names of the rules are preceded with
the word, span.
| | 09:01 |
And then if you take a look at the XHTML
document.
| | 09:07 |
You can see here that this is where the
span begins.
| | 09:12 |
This happens to be the word that was in
Bold.
| | 09:15 |
So this is the word, this is the entire
element and the class equals Bold.
| | 09:22 |
So in an XHTML file span tags are the
equivalent of character styles in InDesign.
| | 09:29 |
Alright.
So now that you have a better
| | 09:31 |
understanding of how paragraph and
character style formatting is converted
| | 09:35 |
to CSS styles.
Let me show you what happens when you
| | 09:38 |
don't use styles to format the text.
I'll go ahead and close all this.
| | 09:44 |
And I'll go back to InDesign.
I'll select this entire intro paragraph
| | 09:50 |
and I'll break the link to this style
that's applied to it.
| | 09:55 |
To do that I'll go to the Paragraph
Styles, Panel menu and choose Break Link
| | 10:00 |
to style.
So now no style is applied to this text,
| | 10:04 |
you can see that.
If you look here at the top of the
| | 10:08 |
Paragraph Styles panel, it says that no
style has been applied to it So now this
| | 10:12 |
text is locally formatted.
I'll also just randomly select a word and
| | 10:18 |
apply Bold to it.
So I've just locally formatted this word
| | 10:23 |
with Bold.
That's why you see a plus sign to the
| | 10:26 |
right of the the style name in the
Paragraph Styles panel.
| | 10:31 |
I'll apply Bold to this word as well.
Alright, so I'll go ahead and export the
| | 10:37 |
ePub file and let's see what happens.
I want to make sure that in the contents
| | 10:46 |
section, once again, I'm not going to
preserve those local overrides.
| | 10:51 |
So when I click Export, none of those
local overrides were preserved.
| | 10:57 |
This first paragraph takes on the default
formatting.
| | 11:01 |
And those two words that I converted to
Bold are no longer Bold.
| | 11:07 |
Now, it is possible to preserve local
formatting.
| | 11:12 |
When you export the ePub file, make sure
and select Preserve Local Overrides.
| | 11:20 |
And now when I click Export, everything
is now formatted properly.
| | 11:26 |
The two words are bold, this paragraph is
centered, has the correct lighting, and
| | 11:30 |
it's italic.
However, let me open this up inside of Oxygen.
| | 11:40 |
I'd like to point out that when you do
this, InDesign generate a couple of extra
| | 11:47 |
CSS rules.
if you have a document with a lot of
| | 11:52 |
local formatting, you're going to get a
lot of strangely named CSS rules.
| | 11:57 |
Which is going to make it more difficult
to later on update your CSS file.
| | 12:02 |
So I really recommend just applying the
character styles and paragraph styles.
| | 12:07 |
That's going to give you the cleanest
workflow, it's going to make your CSS
| | 12:11 |
file much easier to update later on.
All right so now that you understand all
| | 12:17 |
of that I'd like to fore warn you.
There are a couple of common mistakes,
| | 12:21 |
that people make when setting up an
InDesign document to be exported as an
| | 12:25 |
ePub file.
And here's a couple of them.
| | 12:29 |
What they'll do, is they'll select the
paragraph, and they want to add, say,
| | 12:33 |
space after it.
So, they'll use, the Control panel, at
| | 12:37 |
the top, to do that.
I'll add some space like 36 points to the
| | 12:42 |
bottom of this paragraph.
I've done that locally so we see the plus
| | 12:47 |
sign to the right side of the body text
indent style.
| | 12:51 |
This local formatting won't be preserved
unless I check the right options when I
| | 12:55 |
export the ePub file.
Another common mistake that people run
| | 13:01 |
into is in their character style.
They created it, they've properly applied
| | 13:08 |
it but they call it bold.
However, they'll use a variation such as
| | 13:15 |
semi-bold instead.
I'll click OK.
| | 13:19 |
So I've just updated this to use
semi-bold which actually isn't available
| | 13:25 |
the way I've spelled it.
So I need to actually change this to
| | 13:31 |
semi-bold and I'll just.
Edit this style and change that to
| | 13:37 |
semi-bold with a lower case B.
Alright.
| | 13:45 |
So, that font's available.
But now watch what happens when I export
| | 13:51 |
this as an ePub file.
This time I will not preserve the local
| | 13:58 |
overrides, and click Export.
So as you can see, the local overrides
| | 14:04 |
were not maintained.
But also notice that.
| | 14:11 |
Where I faithfully applied character
styles, my bold character style, that
| | 14:15 |
formatting wasn't preserved.
Why is that?
| | 14:19 |
Well, that's because, if a paragraph or a
character style, uses a type style, such
| | 14:24 |
as black, or semi-bold, that text will
not appear as bold in the ePub file.
| | 14:31 |
You must use the actual bold type style,
bold must be in the name of it.
| | 14:37 |
And for italic, the same is true.
As long as the name of the font contains
| | 14:41 |
the word Italic, the text appears
italicized in the ePub file.
| | 14:46 |
So oblique will not be maintained.
So if you are using a font style oblique
| | 14:51 |
you need to change it to use a font style
italic instead.
| | 14:55 |
Which means that you might end up needing
to change some of the fonts that you've
| | 14:58 |
used to set up your InDesign document.
And I should also point out that not all
| | 15:04 |
of the formatting in paragraph, and
character styles is mapped to equivalent
| | 15:08 |
CSS formatting.
For example, drop caps, you can set up a
| | 15:13 |
great looking drop cap in InDesign, but
it's not going to be preserved in the
| | 15:17 |
ePub file.
So, you will wind up having to edit the
| | 15:21 |
ePub file, update the CSS style to format
the drop cap, you're going to have to do
| | 15:26 |
that yourself.
The same is true for paragraph rules
| | 15:31 |
above and below.
If you want line to appear above or below
| | 15:34 |
your text, you're going to have to edit
the ePub file.
| | 15:39 |
Word and letter spacing, same thing.
So often if you want your text to appear
| | 15:43 |
in a certain way.
And you just can't get it to look that
| | 15:47 |
way with inDesign.
The easiest thing to do is just edit the
| | 15:51 |
ePub file and modify the CSS file within
it.
| | 15:55 |
And also just keep in mind that not all
CSS formatting is actually supported by
| | 15:59 |
the various ebook readers on the market
today.
| | 16:03 |
So, it's really important to test your
ebooks on various reading devices, to
| | 16:08 |
make sure that the formatting will appear
as desired.
| | 16:13 |
You see we're still at the beginning of
the eBook revolution.
| | 16:16 |
And I imagine that in the next five or
ten years, we'll be seeing big changes.
| | 16:21 |
And hopefully, we'll have more control
over the design of our eBooks by then.
| | 16:26 |
So now you understand the important role
that paragraph and character styles play
| | 16:30 |
in the InDesign to eBook conversion
process.
| | 16:35 |
You know how important it is to
consistently apply paragraph and
| | 16:38 |
character styles.
Because InDesign uses the applied styles
| | 16:42 |
to determine how your text is formatted
in any pub file.
| | 16:46 |
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Working with nested styles and GREP styles| 00:02 |
Using nested styles and grep styles to
format text in a layout can certainly
| | 00:06 |
save you a lot of time.
But unfortunately the formatting applied
| | 00:10 |
by this styles isn't retained in the
e-pub file when you export it.
| | 00:14 |
So you have to apply actual character
styles to all the text thats formatted
| | 00:18 |
with nested styles and grep styles in
order to preserve that formatting.
| | 00:25 |
In this lesson, I'm going to show you two
ways to speed up the process of applying
| | 00:28 |
character styles to text.
That's formatted with either nested
| | 00:33 |
styles or grep styles.
Notice that the first paragraph of the
| | 00:37 |
body text begins with an initial cap.
And the rest of the first word is set in
| | 00:42 |
small caps.
I formatted these characters with nested styles.
| | 00:47 |
So if I double click the paragraph style
that's applied to this paragraph.
| | 00:51 |
And select the Drop Caps and Nested Style
category you can see that I have set up
| | 00:55 |
two nested styles in order to automate
that formatting.
| | 00:59 |
The I-CAP character style is being
applied through the first character in
| | 01:03 |
the paragraph.
And the small caps character style is
| | 01:07 |
being applied through the rest of the
first word.
| | 01:10 |
And then on the next page, I have a
sample interview.
| | 01:14 |
Notice that the word question is always
larger than the rest of the text, and
| | 01:18 |
it's set in the color red.
The word, answer, is always set in the
| | 01:23 |
color blue.
In order to automate the process of
| | 01:26 |
formatting all this text, I set up 2 grep
styles.
| | 01:30 |
I first created 2 character styles, one
for the question and one for the answer.
| | 01:36 |
And then I could set up the grep style.
So if I double click the Paragraph style
| | 01:40 |
that's applied to all of this text, and
then select the Grep style category.
| | 01:45 |
You can see the two Grep styles that I've
set up.
| | 01:49 |
Here, the Question character style is
being applied to this text.
| | 01:53 |
The word, question, followed by a colon.
And then the Answer character style is
| | 01:57 |
being applied to this text.
The word answer followed by a colon.
| | 02:01 |
It's quite simple.
I'll click OK.
| | 02:04 |
So by nesting those Grep styles within
this Paragraph style.
| | 02:08 |
I can apply all this formatting in a
single click.
| | 02:11 |
So I'll unapply it by applying the basic
paragraph, and then I'll apply that one
| | 02:16 |
paragraph to this entire text frame of
text.
| | 02:21 |
Interview Q&A, and there are the Grep
styles in use.
| | 02:25 |
So they help to automate the process of
formatting this text, but watch what
| | 02:29 |
happens when I export this ePub file.
Send it to the Desktop, and I want to
| | 02:35 |
make sure that in the Contents section,
I'm including the Style definitions.
| | 02:41 |
I'll export this.
And as you can see the initial cap was lost.
| | 02:48 |
The capital letters were maintained
because I typed them that way but now
| | 02:51 |
they're just too big.
And then on the next page the question
| | 02:56 |
and answer text all that formatting was
lost as well.
| | 03:00 |
So once again in order to retain all of
this formatting I need to go back to InDesign.
| | 03:05 |
And apply the actual character styles to
the text thats formatted with nested
| | 03:10 |
styles and grep styles.
So I'll go back to InDesign.
| | 03:14 |
I'll go back up to the first page.
And for the first demonstration, I'm
| | 03:20 |
going to select this text.
Go to the Character Styles panel.
| | 03:24 |
I'd like you to notice that none has been
applied.
| | 03:27 |
But in fact, I know that a character
style is being applied, but it's being
| | 03:31 |
applied as a nested style via the
paragraph style.
| | 03:35 |
Take a close look to the bottom left
corner of the Character Styles panel, and
| | 03:39 |
you will see that ICAP is certainly being
applied to this character.
| | 03:44 |
But not actually being applied.
So then if I select the rest of this
| | 03:48 |
first word, it's the same thing.
The character style none is applied, but
| | 03:54 |
small caps, as shown here at the bottom
left corner, is being applied via the
| | 03:58 |
nested style.
So that's why this formatting is not
| | 04:02 |
being maintained in the ePub file.
I need to literally apply these character
| | 04:07 |
styles, so I'll select the initial cap
and apply it.
| | 04:11 |
And I'll select the rest of the first
word and apply the character style small caps.
| | 04:16 |
All this character style does is reduce
the size of the text to 10 points.
| | 04:22 |
Alright, so watch what happens now.
I'll export the ePub file.
| | 04:27 |
And there it is, so this works but you
don't want to have to manually select
| | 04:32 |
each of those words.
And apply the character sytles to them
| | 04:39 |
especially in long documents.
That would defeat the very purpose for
| | 04:44 |
using method styles and Grep style
anyway.
| | 04:47 |
So let me show you two ways to speed up
the process of applying the character styles.
| | 04:53 |
I'll go ahead and go back to InDesign and
I'll revert this document back to the
| | 04:57 |
last saved version.
So now we're back to the very beginning.
| | 05:02 |
I'm going to show you how to use
InDesign's infamous Find Change dialog,
| | 05:07 |
in order to automate this process.
From the edit menu, I'll choose Find Change.
| | 05:14 |
And you want to make sure and click More
Options, because you're looking for the
| | 05:18 |
Find Format and Change Format boxes.
I don't actually want to find literal
| | 05:24 |
text nor change what I find to literal
text.
| | 05:28 |
I want to find formatting and change the
formatting from one format to another.
| | 05:32 |
Or in this case I'll click this icon here
which will actually allow me to specify
| | 05:36 |
specific attributes to find.
What I want to look for, is a character style.
| | 05:42 |
A character style that I want to find is
ICAP and I want to replace that with
| | 05:46 |
guess what, ICAP.
So what this is going to do is search for
| | 05:51 |
any text that has ICAP applied to it.
And ICAP is applied to that text just not
| | 05:57 |
completely, its applied via the nested
style.
| | 06:02 |
It doesn't actually change the format.
It applies the format ICAP to that text
| | 06:06 |
that was found, which literally applies
ICAP to that text.
| | 06:11 |
I'll click Find and then Change, or I
might as well click Change All.
| | 06:15 |
So, that I can make sure and get all the
instances in the document at the same time.
| | 06:19 |
So, now that I'm done with that one I can
go on to the next.
| | 06:23 |
I'll look for the next style, which is
Small caps, and replace that with small caps.
| | 06:29 |
Once again, find Next, Change all.
So if there were more instances in this
| | 06:34 |
document, and this were a long document,
I would have just now saved a lot of time.
| | 06:40 |
You can do the same for graph styles as
well.
| | 06:42 |
So I could continue this process looking
for the answers, Find next, Change all
| | 06:48 |
and then one more time for the questions.
Find next then must change them all.
| | 06:56 |
All right.
So let's take a look at the result of my work.
| | 07:01 |
If I select this word, you can see that
the Question character style is still
| | 07:05 |
being applied via a grep style.
As noted in the bottom left corner of
| | 07:10 |
this Character Styles panel.
However, it's also been literally applied
| | 07:15 |
to that text, now that I've used the Find
change dialog box to do that.
| | 07:21 |
So now that this character style is
literally applied, I can export this ePub file.
| | 07:30 |
And we can expect to see that formatting,
and there it is.
| | 07:36 |
I'll go to the next page, and all the
question and answer text is properly formatted.
| | 07:42 |
So using the Find Change dialog box to
automatically apply character styles to
| | 07:46 |
any text that's formatted using nested
styles and grep styles is a fairly
| | 07:50 |
automated method.
But with really long documents that
| | 07:55 |
contain a lot of text, even this process
can still take quite a lot of time.
| | 08:01 |
So the next method that i'm going to show
you uses a script called the Apply Nested
| | 08:05 |
Styles script.
It's a cross-platform script that was
| | 08:10 |
written by the owner of In-Tools.
Unfortunately, though, it's not available
| | 08:15 |
for InDesign CS5 yet, but it is available
for InDesign CS4.
| | 08:20 |
To download the script you need to go to
n-tools.com/scripts.html and then you can
| | 08:26 |
click this button here to download the
script.
| | 08:32 |
Let me show you how to install it once
you download the script.
| | 08:35 |
I've actually already downloaded it and
its on my desktop.
| | 08:39 |
So I'll hide Safari, and I'll hide all of
these applications as well.
| | 08:45 |
Here's the script, it's a JavaScript.
And what I need to do, is from the Go
| | 08:51 |
menu, I'll choose Applications.
On the Windows operating system, you just
| | 08:57 |
need to go to your programs folder.
And then the file path is the same from
| | 09:01 |
here on out I'll click on the InDesign
CS4 folder, and then, within that, click
| | 09:05 |
on Scripts.
Within that is a Scripts Panel folder.
| | 09:10 |
This is where I want to put the script.
I'll just drag the script right into that
| | 09:14 |
folder, and now, it will instantly be
available in InDesign CS4.
| | 09:19 |
So I'll open CS4 up.
I just happen to have this same document open.
| | 09:24 |
And then the script will be found by
going to the Window Menu, choosing
| | 09:28 |
Automation and then Scripts.
And since I installed that script in the
| | 09:33 |
Application folder, you'll find it there.
And here it is, in the Root level of the
| | 09:37 |
Application folder.
So when you run the script any text
| | 09:41 |
formatted with a nested style gets the
same character style applied to it.
| | 09:47 |
Then the formatting will finally be
maintained in the ePub file.
| | 09:52 |
I'll go ahead and select this text then
you can see that the character style is
| | 09:55 |
definitely not applied yet.
Now, I'll double click the script that's
| | 10:00 |
all I've have to do.
That runs the script, and now I'll double
| | 10:03 |
check, to find out yes, indeed ICAP has
been applied to the first letter, and
| | 10:07 |
small caps to the rest of the first word.
Now although the script was originally
| | 10:13 |
written to work with nested styles, it
can also work with GREP styles.
| | 10:19 |
So when I ran that script, it processed
all the grep styles as well.
| | 10:23 |
However, I've discovered it's not always
perfect with grep styles.
| | 10:27 |
For some reason, it just doesn't convert
every instance.
| | 10:31 |
So if I click on this instance, I can see
that it has worked.
| | 10:35 |
This one works.
But, for some reason, now, when I select
| | 10:38 |
this word, Question.
It didn't convert that.
| | 10:43 |
It did convert this one but not this one
so its a little inconsistent with grep styles.
| | 10:47 |
However it still can save a lot of time
because if I had a really long document.
| | 10:53 |
I would just double click that script and
then go back and make sure either using
| | 10:56 |
the find change dialog box.
Or manually applying the character styles
| | 11:01 |
I could just finish applying the rest of
the neccessary character styles.
| | 11:06 |
I'm willing to be that it won't take too
long before the script is compatible with
| | 11:10 |
InDesign CS5 and this issue with grep
styles will probably be fixed as well.
| | 11:15 |
I'd keep checking back to the website for
any updates.
| | 11:19 |
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Exporting bulleted lists| 00:02 |
In this lesson, I'm going to walk you
through the process of exporting properly
| | 00:06 |
formatted bulleted lists from InDesign to
an EPUB file.
| | 00:10 |
InDesign offers two ways to create
bulleted lists.
| | 00:14 |
You can create them manually, or you can
create them automatically using
| | 00:18 |
InDesign's Bullets and Numbering feature.
I'm going to demonstrate both methods,
| | 00:23 |
and then I'll show you how InDesign
exports each type of list to an EPUB file.
| | 00:29 |
To manually set up a bulleted list, you
first need to insert a Bullet character,
| | 00:33 |
followed by a Tab character and then the
text.
| | 00:38 |
And then, in order to create the hanging
indent, which properly aligns the text
| | 00:41 |
along the left side, we need to use a
combination of two settings.
| | 00:46 |
You first need to apply a left indent
value.
| | 00:50 |
I'm using a value of 12 points.
That pushes all the text to the right.
| | 00:55 |
And then, in order to bring just the
first line of text in each paragraph back
| | 00:59 |
to touch the left edge of the text frame,
I applied a negative 12 point value for
| | 01:04 |
the first line left indent.
To automatically create a bulleted list,
| | 01:11 |
it's even easier.
All you have to do is select all the text
| | 01:14 |
that comprises the list, and then go on
up to the control panel and click the
| | 01:18 |
Bulleted List icon.
It's as simple as that.
| | 01:23 |
And notice that when you create and
automatic bulleted list, you can't select
| | 01:27 |
the tab character, or the bullet
character.
| | 01:30 |
So if you want to format a bulleted list
that was created automatically, you need
| | 01:34 |
to hold the Option key or the Alt key on
the PC, and click that Bulleted List icon
| | 01:39 |
once again.
That opens the Bullets and Numbering
| | 01:44 |
Dialog Box where you can customize the
bullet character and change the alignment
| | 01:48 |
of the list.
I'll change the alignment of this list so
| | 01:52 |
that it matches the list above, and click
OK.
| | 01:56 |
So, as you can see, by using an automatic
bulleted list you can save quite a bit of time.
| | 02:02 |
All right.
So, now that this list is set up, I'll go
| | 02:04 |
ahead and create a paragraph style and
apply it to all of this text, so that
| | 02:08 |
this formatting is correctly maintained
when I export the EPUB file.
| | 02:14 |
So, with all this text selected, I'll
hold the Option key, or the Alt key down,
| | 02:18 |
as I click the Create New icon at the
bottom of the Paragraph Styles panel.
| | 02:24 |
I'll call this Automatic List.
And,make sure that I apply it to the
| | 02:28 |
selection, and click OK.
So, now that that style has been applied,
| | 02:35 |
I can go up to the File menu, choose
Export For, and then EPUB.
| | 02:40 |
I'll send this file to the desktop and
save it.
| | 02:44 |
And before I click Export, there are a
few options that I should specify.
| | 02:48 |
When exporting a document that contains
bulleted lists that were created
| | 02:52 |
automatically using InDesign's Bullets
and Numbering feature, you'll definitely
| | 02:56 |
want to consider the two options that are
available in this menu here.
| | 03:01 |
The Bullets menu.
There are two options to choose from, Map
| | 03:05 |
To Unordered Lists, or Convert To Text.
The option that you chose here determines
| | 03:11 |
how the list is exported to the EPUB
file, and keep in mind that these two
| | 03:14 |
options only apply to those lists that
you've automatically created.
| | 03:20 |
So if all of your bulleted lists were
manually created, you can ignore these
| | 03:24 |
two options.
For now I'll just use the default option
| | 03:29 |
map to unordered lists.
This option converts the bulleted lists
| | 03:34 |
to HTML unordered lists which are
formatted with the ul and li tags.
| | 03:40 |
I'll show you exactly what that looks
like here in a moment.
| | 03:43 |
I also want to make sure and view this
eBook after exporting it.
| | 03:47 |
So I'll select this option, and I want to
go to the Contents section, because I
| | 03:51 |
want to deselect Include Embeddable
Fonts, I don't want to embed the fonts.
| | 03:56 |
And I also want to deselect Preserve
Local Overrides.
| | 04:00 |
Although this document doesn't have any
local overrides, I'll just go ahead and
| | 04:05 |
deselect it anyway, and click Export, and
here are the results.
| | 04:11 |
Notice that the list that was created
manually no longer aligns properly, but
| | 04:15 |
the list that was created automatically
does align properly.
| | 04:21 |
So, to understand why this is happening,
I'll open this EPUB file up with my XML editor.
| | 04:27 |
From the Archive browser window, I'll
click the Open Archive button, locate
| | 04:31 |
that EPUB file and open it up.
Let's take a look at the XHTML document,
| | 04:36 |
I'll double click it.
Here's the first list that was created
| | 04:40 |
manually and here's the second list that
was created automatically.
| | 04:45 |
Notice that the automatically created
list, was converted to HTML markup, using
| | 04:50 |
the Unordered list tag, to define the
list.
| | 04:54 |
And then, each item in the list, was
defined with an LI tag, which stands for
| | 04:58 |
List Item.
The list that I created manually, was
| | 05:02 |
converted to normal p tags.
And notice that the actual bullet
| | 05:07 |
character appears.
The tab character was converted to a
| | 05:10 |
regular space.
So that's why this first list didn't
| | 05:14 |
properly align, because the tab character
is needed in order for these lines of
| | 05:18 |
text to align along the left side.
I'll go back to the XHTML file, and
| | 05:25 |
notice that the bullet character was not
actually placed within each of these items.
| | 05:31 |
Because when you use an HTML unordered
list, the eBook creator automatically
| | 05:35 |
adds the bullets for you.
It even automatically formats the list
| | 05:40 |
and properly aligns it along the left
side.
| | 05:43 |
So by using InDesign's automatic Bullets
and Numbering feature to create the
| | 05:47 |
bulleted lists, you can get more control
over how these lists are formatted in an
| | 05:51 |
EPUB file.
But what if your bulleted list used a
| | 05:56 |
special bullet character, such as a Zapf
Dingbats character?
| | 06:01 |
I'll go ahead and set my list up that
way.
| | 06:03 |
I'll go back to InDesign, and I'll change
the bullet character from a normal
| | 06:07 |
bullet, to a square.
I'll hold the Option key, or the Alt key
| | 06:11 |
on the PC, and click the bulleted list
icon, and then to create a custom bullet
| | 06:15 |
character, I'll click the add button from
the Font Family menu, I'll scroll down,
| | 06:20 |
and select Zapf Dingbats.
And then here's the square that I'd like
| | 06:26 |
to use, the one with the little drop
shadow behind and I'll click OK.
| | 06:30 |
Select that the bullet character and
click OK once again, that inserts it.
| | 06:35 |
And now notice that I've just applied
that formatting locally, that needs to be
| | 06:38 |
defined in my paragraph style if I
want to retain in the EPUB file.
| | 06:43 |
So I"m going to update my paragraph style
with the local formatting.
| | 06:47 |
By going to the Paragraph Styles panel
menu and choosing Redefine Style.
| | 06:52 |
All right, so the style has been
redefined.
| | 06:54 |
I'll export the EPUB file, and let's
check out the results.
| | 07:02 |
notice what happened.
My character was not maintained.
| | 07:07 |
And why was that?
Let's check this file out in Oxygen again.
| | 07:10 |
I'll close these old files, and reopen
the new EPUB file.
| | 07:18 |
Again, that list was converted to an
unordered list.
| | 07:22 |
And again, because it's an unordered
list, the display of that list is left up
| | 07:26 |
to the discretion of the eBook reader.
So how are we going to export this list
| | 07:31 |
with my custom bullet?
I'll show you.
| | 07:34 |
Back to InDesign, File > Export, again
for EPUB.
| | 07:40 |
That's what this option is here for,
convert to text.
| | 07:43 |
So if you've setup an automatic bulleted
list and it uses custom bullets, and you
| | 07:48 |
want to maintain those, you'll need to
convert the bullets to text.
| | 07:55 |
Now we get question marks.
Before I explain why we get question
| | 07:59 |
marks, let's open this file up into
Oxygen.
| | 08:07 |
Again, I'll open up the XHTML file.
Now this time take a look at what happened.
| | 08:12 |
Since I converted that list to regular
text, it's now formatted with P tags,
| | 08:17 |
just normal P tags.
And the actual bullet character has been
| | 08:23 |
included in the text.
Now this bullet character will not appear
| | 08:27 |
in Adobe Digital Editions, because that
font has not been embedded within the
| | 08:32 |
EPUB file.
Now, a few eBook readers can actually
| | 08:36 |
display a font, as long as it's available
on the reading device.
| | 08:41 |
So one of those eBook readers that can
display those fonts is the EPUB reader
| | 08:46 |
plug-in for Firefox.
I'll go ahead and choose File > Open >
| | 08:50 |
from within Firefox.
Locate my EPUB file and open it right up.
| | 08:56 |
And as you can see Firefox was able to
locate that font, and display this
| | 09:00 |
character in the right font.
In fact the Apple iPad has this font
| | 09:05 |
installed on it, so if you were to open
this same EPUB file up on the iPad, this
| | 09:09 |
is what you would see.
Again, because the iPad has that font on
| | 09:14 |
the device that character can be
displayed in a correct font.
| | 09:19 |
However, notice that since I converted
this to normal text we no longer get a
| | 09:24 |
nicely aligned bulleted list.
So, obviously you can't have the best of
| | 09:30 |
both worlds.
As a last alternative, if you really want
| | 09:34 |
to make sure that you used that bullet
character, then you could create a
| | 09:37 |
graphic out of the bullet character and
insert it as an inline graphic.
| | 09:44 |
Then you can be sure that when you export
the EPUB file, your bullet character will
| | 09:48 |
be maintained because it's a graphic.
However, there are drawbacks to this
| | 09:53 |
method as well, because some eBook
readers have limited memory.
| | 09:57 |
So when you scroll to a page with too
many graphics on it, the device will
| | 10:00 |
actually crash because it can't load all
the graphics.
| | 10:05 |
So I recommend that use a method that
works best for your needs for the type of
| | 10:08 |
publication that you're producing.
And then also make sure and test it out
| | 10:13 |
on different eBook reading devices to
make sure that you're going to get the
| | 10:16 |
results that you want.
So you've just learned quite a lot.
| | 10:21 |
You've learned that there are two
different ways to create a bulleted list
| | 10:24 |
in InDesign, and then when you export the
lists, you've learned that there are
| | 10:27 |
different options for doing so in order
to achieve different results.
| | 10:32 |
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Exporting numbered lists| 00:02 |
In this lesson, I'm going to demonstrate
how to export numbered lists, from
| | 00:05 |
InDesign, to an EPUB file.
InDesign offers two ways to create
| | 00:10 |
numbered lists.
You can create them manually, or you can
| | 00:14 |
create them automatically, using
InDesign's Bullets and Numbering feature.
| | 00:19 |
I'll first demonstrate both methods and
then I'll show you how InDesign exports
| | 00:23 |
each type of list to an EPUB file.
So, to manually setup a numbered list,
| | 00:29 |
you start by inserting the number
followed by a tag character and then the text.
| | 00:35 |
Then, to setup the hanging indent so that
the text properly align along the left
| | 00:39 |
edge, you use a combination of two
settings.
| | 00:43 |
You start by applying a left indent which
I've already done.
| | 00:48 |
I've applied a left indent of 12 points
so this pushes all the text to the right.
| | 00:53 |
Then in order to bring just the first
line of text in each paragraph back to
| | 00:57 |
the left edge of the text frame.
You insert a negative value for the first
| | 01:02 |
line left indent, and as you can see I've
inserted a negative 12 point value.
| | 01:08 |
Now, creating an automatic numbered list
is even easier because all you have to do
| | 01:12 |
is select all the text that makes up your
numbered list, and then go up to the
| | 01:16 |
Control Panel and click the Number List
icon, its really that easy.
| | 01:23 |
In fact, one of the main benefits of
using automatic numbered list is that you
| | 01:27 |
can enter new lines and the list
renumbers itself.
| | 01:32 |
If I delete these lines it renumbers
itself again.
| | 01:37 |
Now, I should point out that when working
with this type of list its not possible
| | 01:41 |
to select the tab nor the number.
So if you want to format the numbers or
| | 01:46 |
choose a different numbering style for
your list, you'll need to select all the
| | 01:51 |
text, hold down the Option key or the Alt
key on the PC and click that Numbered
| | 01:55 |
List icon once again.
That opens the bullets and Numbering
| | 02:01 |
dialog box, where you can choose a
different format for your number, you can
| | 02:05 |
choose different numbering modes, and you
can choose how your list is aligned.
| | 02:11 |
I'll go ahead and make sure that this
list aligns in the same way that the list
| | 02:15 |
above aligns.
And I want to make sure that the
| | 02:19 |
numbering continues from the previous
number, and click OK.
| | 02:24 |
Alright, so now that you know the basics
of creating a numbered list let me show
| | 02:29 |
you a more complex numbered list.
This is a multi-level numbered list it
| | 02:34 |
was set up using InDesign's bullets and
numbering feature.
| | 02:38 |
It contains three levels, notice that the
level 2 entries take on the number of the
| | 02:42 |
first level followed by a decimal point,
and then the number of the entry.
| | 02:48 |
And then the third level entries use
letters instead of numbers.
| | 02:54 |
I can quickly change the level of a
paragraph by simply applying a different
| | 02:58 |
paragraph style.
So as you can see, by using InDesign's
| | 03:02 |
bullets and numbering feature, combined
with paragraph styles, you can really
| | 03:06 |
speed up the time that it takes to create
numbered lists.
| | 03:11 |
All right, let's go back to the first two
lists that I created, and export them as
| | 03:15 |
an EPUB file.
Now before I do that, I need to set up a
| | 03:19 |
paragraph style for this numbered list,
so that the formatting is correctly
| | 03:22 |
maintain in the EPUB file.
So I'll hold down the Option key or the
| | 03:27 |
Alt key, as I click the Create New icon
at the bottom of the Paragraph Styles
| | 03:31 |
panel, and I'll call this automatic list.
And make sure that it's applied to the
| | 03:39 |
selection, which it is, and click OK.
So now that that's applied, I can export
| | 03:43 |
the EPUB file.
From the File menu I'll choose Export for
| | 03:48 |
and then EPUB.
Now when exporting a document with
| | 03:53 |
numbered lists that were created
automatically, you'll want to specify one
| | 03:56 |
of these three options here in this
numbers menu.
| | 04:01 |
However, if your document only contains
manually created numbered lists, you can
| | 04:05 |
ignore this option altogether.
With that said, the option that you
| | 04:10 |
choose here determines how the lists are
exported to the EPUB file, so it's
| | 04:13 |
important that you understand each of
them.
| | 04:17 |
The default option, map to ordered lists,
is used to convert the numbered lists to
| | 04:22 |
HTML ordered lists, which are formatted
with the ol and the li tags.
| | 04:29 |
The map to static ordered list option
also converts the numbered lists into
| | 04:34 |
HTML ordered lists, but it assigns a
value attribute to each list item as well.
| | 04:41 |
And then you would want to choose convert
to text, in order to convert the lists to
| | 04:45 |
normal HTML paragraphs that use a p tag.
This option is really useful when the
| | 04:51 |
lists in your document use a numbering
system other than simple numbers, and you
| | 04:55 |
want to preserve them in the EPUB file.
All right, let's see what I get when I
| | 05:00 |
choose the default option.
I'll make sure and click to view the
| | 05:04 |
eBook after exporting, and then also in
the contents section of the dialog box, I
| | 05:08 |
don't want to include the embeddable
fonts, so I'll deselect that, and I don't
| | 05:12 |
need to preserve any local overrides, so
I'll deselect that as well, and now I can
| | 05:15 |
export it.
And here are the results, notice that
| | 05:22 |
when you manually create a numbered list,
the lines in the list don't align so well
| | 05:27 |
along the left side.
However, the list that was created
| | 05:33 |
automatically is perfect aligned.
I will decrease the text size so you can
| | 05:37 |
see a little more of it, so why is that
now in order to show you why this is
| | 05:41 |
happening I need to open this EPUB file
into my XML editor, I am using Oxygen so
| | 05:46 |
at the top of the Archive Browser window
I will click the Open Archive button
| | 05:50 |
Select that Epub file and Open it up.
Let's take a look at how that XHTML file
| | 05:59 |
was generated.
So, here's the list that was created
| | 06:04 |
manually and here's the list that was
created automatically.
| | 06:09 |
Notice that the manually created list was
converted to regular paragraphs that use
| | 06:14 |
the basic P tag.
I noticed that the actual numbers appear
| | 06:18 |
in the file followed by a space, the tab
character was converted to a regular
| | 06:23 |
space, so that's why the manually created
list isn't aligned properly in the EPUB
| | 06:28 |
file, actual taps are needed here between
the number and the (UNKNOWN) in order to
| | 06:33 |
make this list align properly.
And notice that the list that was created
| | 06:41 |
automatically was converted to an ordered
list using the OL tag, and each item in
| | 06:46 |
the list is using the LI tag, which
stands for list item.
| | 06:53 |
Notice that the numbers aren't part of
the actual text in this file.
| | 06:57 |
They are not necessary because when an
ebook reader encounters an ordered list
| | 07:01 |
it adds the numbers for you and it
properly formats the list so that it
| | 07:05 |
looks nice in the ebook reader.
It's perfectly aligned along the left
| | 07:11 |
edge for that reason.
Alright, so now that you understand how
| | 07:18 |
an HTML ordered list is marked up let me
go back to InDesign and re-export the
| | 07:26 |
EPUB file.
This time I'll convert the automatic
| | 07:33 |
numbered list to a static ordered list
and export it.
| | 07:39 |
And this actually gives us the same
results but the code looks different lets
| | 07:43 |
take a look at it how open up oxygen I
will keep this file open in fact and I
| | 07:47 |
will save a copy of it and now I close
this archive and open up the new one.
| | 07:57 |
Let's take a look at that XHTML to find
out how that list was generated and if
| | 08:01 |
you look closely here as I switch back
and forth between these two windows, the
| | 08:05 |
only difference in the way that that list
was generated is that these list items
| | 08:09 |
have value attributes in them.
Value attributes give you much more
| | 08:17 |
control over the numbering of your lists.
So I could change these numbers to change
| | 08:22 |
the numbers that are used in the list.
Let's start this first value with five,
| | 08:27 |
the next one with six, and then seven and
eight.
| | 08:32 |
I'll save this.
And I'll re-open the EPUB file so I'll
| | 08:37 |
hide oxygen close this file and hide
InDesign.
| | 08:43 |
Now I can double click the EPUB file to
open it back up.
| | 08:47 |
Now, it's important to understand that
Adobe Digital Editions doesn't support
| | 08:52 |
that numbering somehow, but other eBook
readers do, such as the EPUB reader
| | 08:56 |
add-on for Firefox.
So let's open that same EPUB file up
| | 09:01 |
inside of Firefox.
From the File menu, I'll choose Open,
| | 09:05 |
locate that EPUB file and open it up, and
here you can see that that numbering is supported.
| | 09:11 |
So by using static ordered lists, you can
get more control over the actual
| | 09:15 |
numbering that's used.
But unfortunately, this is not supported
| | 09:20 |
in all eBook readers.
Alright, so now that you understand how
| | 09:24 |
the first two export options for our
numbered lists work.
| | 09:28 |
Let me demonstrate the last option, and
show you just how important it can be.
| | 09:34 |
This time, I'm going to export my multi
level numbered list instead.
| | 09:43 |
I'll go ahead and start with the default
option, map to ordered lists, and I'll
| | 09:47 |
click export, and look what happened
here.
| | 09:51 |
All of my special numbering was lost.
So since I'm leaving the numbering up to
| | 09:56 |
the eBook reader, the eBook reader is
just adding the basic number to these items.
| | 10:03 |
But, I had special numbering.
So to maintain that, I need to go back to
| | 10:07 |
InDesign, re-export the EPUB file, and
this time, I want to make sure and
| | 10:12 |
convert the numbers to actual text.
Now watch what happens.
| | 10:20 |
All of my special numbering was
maintained, the letters, appear properly,
| | 10:24 |
the only problem is that I don't get
perfect alignment along the left edges.
| | 10:29 |
But I'm willing to accept that, because
the actual numbering is used, is much
| | 10:33 |
more important.
Well, you've learned quite a bit in this lesson.
| | 10:37 |
You've learned two different ways for
creating numbered lists and you've
| | 10:41 |
learned the ins and outs of exporting
numbered lists to an EPUB file.
| | 10:45 |
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Exporting footnotes| 00:02 |
Footnotes are often used in long
documents to add support and information
| | 00:05 |
at the bottom of a page.
In this lesson, you'll learn what happens
| | 00:09 |
to Footnotes when you export them from
InDesign to an EPUB file.
| | 00:13 |
I'll start by inserting a couple of
Footnotes and then I'll export the document.
| | 00:19 |
So, to insert a Footnote, position your
cursor where you would like the reference
| | 00:22 |
number to appear.
And then go up to the Type menu, and
| | 00:26 |
choose Insert Footnote.
The Footnote reference number appears as
| | 00:31 |
a superscript in the text.
And the Footnote itself appears at the
| | 00:34 |
bottom of the page.
I'll go ahead and type in some text.
| | 00:39 |
(SOUND).
And now, I'll insert another Footnote on
| | 00:42 |
the next page.
I'll add a Footnote to this word here, go
| | 00:46 |
up to the Type menu and choose Insert
Footnote.
| | 00:50 |
And notice that the Footnotes were
automatically numbered, so here's another Footnote.
| | 00:56 |
(SOUND).
Now, it is possible to change the
| | 00:58 |
formatting of the Footnotes in the
document.
| | 01:02 |
You can go up to the Type menu and choose
Document Footnote Options to do that.
| | 01:08 |
There are a number of options in this
dialog box, which gives you complete
| | 01:11 |
control over how your Footnotes appear in
the document.
| | 01:14 |
But keep in mind that the formatting you
apply here will not be retained in the
| | 01:18 |
EPUB file.
So I'll just continue using the generic
| | 01:22 |
Footnote design and now I'll export the
EPUB file.
| | 01:26 |
Let's see what happens to these Footnotes
when I do that.
| | 01:28 |
From the File menu, I'll chose Export For
and then EPUB.
| | 01:34 |
I'll definitely want to view my eBook my
after exporting it.
| | 01:37 |
And in the Contents section, I'll
deselect Include Embeddable Fonts so that
| | 01:41 |
they're not embedded and preserve local
overwrites so that none of the local
| | 01:45 |
overwrites are preserved and then I'll
click Export.
| | 01:53 |
So here's the Footnote reference number.
Notice that it was converted to a
| | 01:57 |
clickable Hyperlink, so when I click it,
I'm taken quickly to the Footnote text,
| | 02:01 |
which is now located at the very end of
all the text in my eBook.
| | 02:07 |
So, Footnotes are converted to End notes,
and that makes sense, because eBooks
| | 02:11 |
don't define page structure.
Now if your eBook is made up of multiple
| | 02:16 |
XHTML files, the end notes will actually
appear at the bottom of each section in
| | 02:20 |
your eBook, instead of at the very bottom
of all the text in the eBook.
| | 02:25 |
So, to quickly jump back to the Footnote
reference number, I can just click one of
| | 02:29 |
these numbers here.
That takes me right back to it.
| | 02:33 |
Convenient, isn't it?
Now, you might be wondering if you can
| | 02:37 |
change the formatting of the Footnote
reference number in the end note text.
| | 02:42 |
That's certainly possible but you'll need
to edit the CSS file within your eBook in
| | 02:46 |
order to modify the formatting.
So, as you can see, working with
| | 02:51 |
Footnotes is really quite easy.
Just insert them in the InDesign document.
| | 02:56 |
You don't have to worry about the actual
formatting of the Footnotes in the
| | 02:59 |
InDesign document.
And then, just know that when you export
| | 03:02 |
them, they're converted to end notes.
| | 03:04 |
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Exporting hyperlinks| 00:02 |
Hyperlinks are really useful in eBooks.
Some hyperlinks are used to jump from one
| | 00:06 |
page to another.
Other hyperlinks take you quickly to a website.
| | 00:11 |
And other hyperlinks can even link to an
email address.
| | 00:15 |
When you convert an InDesign document to
an EPUB file, most of the different types
| | 00:18 |
of hyperlinks are maintained.
So it only makes sense to include them in
| | 00:23 |
an eBook.
In this lesson, I'm going to show you how
| | 00:26 |
to create several different types of
hyperlinks.
| | 00:29 |
Then I'm going to demonstrate what
happens to the hyperlinks when you export
| | 00:32 |
them to an EPUB file.
To insert hyperlinks, you use the
| | 00:37 |
hyperlinks panel.
Which can be found by going up to the
| | 00:40 |
window menu, choosing interactive, and
then hyperlinks.
| | 00:45 |
Notice that the hyperlinks panel is
divided into two parts, a hyperlink
| | 00:48 |
section at the top, and a cross
references section at the bottom of the panel.
| | 00:55 |
You can drag the divider bar, right here
in the middle, in order to adjust the
| | 00:59 |
amount of space that each section takes
up.
| | 01:03 |
Perhaps the most basic type of hyperlink
that you can create is a hyperlink that
| | 01:07 |
links to a website.
I'll go ahead and create one.
| | 01:12 |
I'm going to convert this website into a
hyperlink.
| | 01:16 |
With the text selected, all I need to do
is go to the top of the Hyperlinks panel
| | 01:21 |
and type in the URL that I want to link
to.
| | 01:28 |
So you can type in a complete URL, it
doesn't actually have to be the same as
| | 01:31 |
the text that you have selected.
In fact the text that you have selected
| | 01:36 |
could be just a simple word, like a
company name.
| | 01:39 |
So now I'll just press Enter or Return,
and that creates the hyperlink.
| | 01:44 |
To change the settings for a hyperlink,
just double-click it in the Hyperlinks panel.
| | 01:49 |
Here you can actually apply a character
style to the hyperlink.
| | 01:53 |
I'll go ahead and do that.
I'll apply a character style that I've
| | 01:56 |
created for that, called hyperlink.
And that really just applies bold
| | 02:00 |
formatting to it.
You can also apply a rectangle around
| | 02:05 |
that hyperlink that creates a box around
the hyperlink, but I'd rather not see that.
| | 02:11 |
So I'll choose to create an invisible
rectangle around that hyperlink, and
| | 02:15 |
click OK.
So now that my hyperlink has been
| | 02:19 |
created, I can test it out by clicking
this right arrow icon here.
| | 02:24 |
This will take me to the destination of
the selected hyperlink, and it loads that
| | 02:28 |
website, so now I know that it works.
And if you want to quickly find the
| | 02:34 |
source of a selected hyperlink in the
panel you can do that as well.
| | 02:39 |
So let's say I'm on a totally different
page.
| | 02:42 |
And I don't know where that hyperlink is.
I can see it in the Hyperlinks panel, but
| | 02:46 |
I don't know where the actual source text
is.
| | 02:49 |
So I can select the hyperlink, and then
click this left arrow here to go to the
| | 02:53 |
source of this hyperlink.
And the hyperlink is selected for me.
| | 02:58 |
All right, let's take a look at the other
types of hyperlinks that you can create.
| | 03:03 |
Here's a note to the reader instructing
them to refer to the iPad User Guide for
| | 03:08 |
additional help.
I can convert this text to a hyperlink
| | 03:13 |
that opens the actual User Guide when you
click on it.
| | 03:16 |
Let me show you how that works.
So, with this text selected I'll go to
| | 03:20 |
the bottom of the hyperlinks panel and
click the Create New Hyperlink button.
| | 03:26 |
That opens up the New Hyperlink dialog
box, and here within the link to menu I
| | 03:30 |
can choose the type of hyperlink that I'd
like to create.
| | 03:35 |
So, I'll choose File, to link to a file.
And now, I need to specify the path, to
| | 03:40 |
where that file is located, so I'll click
this folder icon, over here, to the right
| | 03:44 |
of the path field.
And here's the PDF, that I'd like to link
| | 03:50 |
to, so I'll select that, and Open it, and
I'll click OK.
| | 03:55 |
So now I can test that hyperlink out, I
will select the hyperlink and click this
| | 03:59 |
right arrow icon to go to that
destination which opens up that PDF
| | 04:02 |
inside of Acrobat.
All right, another type of hyperlink that
| | 04:09 |
works in an EPUB file is one that links
to an email address.
| | 04:13 |
I have an email address up above.
Here it is, I'll go ahead and select it,
| | 04:17 |
and to create a new hyperlink once again
I'll click the New Hyperlink button at
| | 04:20 |
the bottom of the Hyperlinks panel.
And this time I want to link to an email address.
| | 04:28 |
Here you need to type in the email
address that you want to send an email to.
| | 04:32 |
So I'll just type that in.
(SOUND).
| | 04:36 |
You can even type in the subject line of
the email.
| | 04:39 |
And then when somebody clicks the
hyperlink, their default application is
| | 04:43 |
opened up, and a new email is created
with the subject line.
| | 04:47 |
In this case, I'll leave the subject line
up to the person who is sending the
| | 04:50 |
email, and I'll click OK.
So now what if you wanted to create a
| | 04:55 |
hyperlink that jumps to another page in
the document?
| | 04:59 |
InDesign lets you create such a
hyperlink.
| | 05:02 |
You could select any text create the
hyperlink and link to an actual page.
| | 05:07 |
But hyperlinks that jump to specific
pages are actually discarded in the EPUB
| | 05:12 |
file and why.
Because there's actually no concept of
| | 05:16 |
pages in an eBook.
So, this type of hyperlink is not support
| | 05:20 |
in EPUB files; however, if you wanted to
set up this type of hyperlink you could
| | 05:25 |
by using a text anchor.
Let me show you how that works.
| | 05:31 |
On the last page of this document.
I'd like to convert this text right here,
| | 05:36 |
to a hyperlink.
So that when I click it, I'm taken
| | 05:39 |
quickly to the start of a chapter.
I've actually seen this done quite often,
| | 05:44 |
in some of the eBook versions of Travel
Guides, that I have in my iPad.
| | 05:48 |
So to set up this type of hyperlink, you
first need to determine which text the
| | 05:52 |
hyperlink should jump to.
And then turn it into a hyperlink destination.
| | 05:58 |
Since I want my hyperlink to jump to the
beginning of the chapter, I'll go to that page.
| | 06:04 |
And since the page number is the top-most
text, I'll make this my hyperlink destination.
| | 06:10 |
I'll select it and then from the
Hyperlinks Panel menu, I'll choose New
| | 06:14 |
Hyperlink Destination.
I'll want this to be the text anchor
| | 06:20 |
type, and I'll just continue using the
number five as the name of the
| | 06:24 |
destination and click OK.
Now I can go back to the last page and
| | 06:29 |
create the hyperlink.
So to do that I'll select the text.
| | 06:35 |
Create the new hyperlink.
And this time, I want to link to a text anchor.
| | 06:40 |
And notice that within this document,
which I currently have open, there is one
| | 06:44 |
text anchor.
The one I just created.
| | 06:46 |
And that's the one I want to link to.
So I'll click OK.
| | 06:49 |
And now this is a hyperlink.
I can even test it.
| | 06:54 |
I'll click the right arrow.
That takes me to the destination.
| | 06:57 |
And then I can select this once again and
go to the source file and go the source text.
| | 07:05 |
Something else that I'd like to mention,
if you'd use a book file to manage the
| | 07:09 |
individual chapters in your publication,
you can then create a hyperlinks that
| | 07:13 |
jump to destinations and other documents.
You would first need to have the document open.
| | 07:20 |
And then you could select the name of
your document from this list.
| | 07:24 |
And then any text anchors in that
document would appear in a text anchor menu.
| | 07:29 |
And then, when you export the EPUB file
from the InDesign book file.
| | 07:33 |
All the hyperlinks will be properly
created.
| | 07:37 |
All right, so now that you know how to
insert the different types of hyperlinks,
| | 07:40 |
I'll go ahead and export the EPUB file,
so that you can see what happens to the hyperlinks.
| | 07:47 |
From the File menu, I'll choose Export
For, and then EPUB.
| | 07:57 |
And as you can see the hyperlinks were
successfully created.
| | 08:01 |
And notice that Adobe Digital Editions
has added the default formatting to them
| | 08:05 |
for hyperlinks.
I'll go ahead and click on this
| | 08:08 |
hyperlinks to show you that it will work,
it takes me right to the website.
| | 08:14 |
If I clicked on this hyperlink, that
would open up my email program, so that I
| | 08:17 |
could send an email.
If I click on this hyperlink, that opens
| | 08:23 |
up the PDF.
Now this type of hyperlink that opens up
| | 08:27 |
an external file isn't supported on all
eBook readers.
| | 08:32 |
And for the eBook readers that do support
this type of hyperlink, it will only work
| | 08:36 |
if the actual file is available on the
eBook reader.
| | 08:41 |
If the file can't be found, the hyperlink
won't work, of course.
| | 08:46 |
All right, if I scroll to the bottom of
this document, we'll find that hyperlink
| | 08:49 |
that I created, which will take me to the
top of the chapter when I click it.
| | 08:54 |
So, in that way you can jump from one
page to the next.
| | 08:58 |
So, as you can see, by using a hyperlink
that jumps to a text anchor, you can link
| | 09:02 |
to other pages within the EPUB file.
All right, so, you've just learned how to
| | 09:09 |
create different types of hyperlinks and
you can see that they're preserved when
| | 09:12 |
exported to an EPUB file.
Just keep in mind that InDesign preserves
| | 09:18 |
all the hyperlinks that jump to webpages,
email address, files, and text anchors.
| | 09:24 |
But hyperlinks that reference specific
pages are discarded, and with that said
| | 09:29 |
keep in mind that not all eBook readers
support hyperlinks.
| | 09:34 |
And among those eBook readers that do
support them not every destination type
| | 09:38 |
is supported.
And in fact, a few eBook readers actually
| | 09:44 |
ignore hyperlinks altogether.
| | 09:48 |
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Exporting cross-references| 00:00 |
If the ebook you're creating is a manual
or some type of reference document.
| | 00:06 |
You'll likely want to include
cross-references, which are used to refer
| | 00:10 |
readers from one part of your document to
another.
| | 00:13 |
In this lesson, you'll learn how to
create cross-references in InDesign that
| | 00:17 |
are converted to clickable hyperlinks in
an EPUB file.
| | 00:21 |
To create a cross-reference, you use the
Hyperlinks panel, which can be found by
| | 00:26 |
going up to the Window > Interactive >
Hyperlinks.
| | 00:31 |
Notice that the Hyperlinks panel is
divided into two parts.
| | 00:35 |
The Hyperlinks section is at the top and
the Cross-References section is at the bottom.
| | 00:40 |
I'd like to create a cross-reference at
the bottom of this paragraph that refers
| | 00:44 |
the reader to Chapter Three for more
information.
| | 00:48 |
Creating a cross-reference is actually
quite simple.
| | 00:52 |
Just position your cursor where you would
like the cross-reference to appear, and
| | 00:56 |
then click the create new cross-reference
button at the bottom of the hyperlinks panel.
| | 01:02 |
At the top of this dialog box, you can
specify whether the cross-reference
| | 01:06 |
should be derived from a paragraph style
such as a heading style or from a text
| | 01:10 |
anchor that you've created.
To link to a text anchor, you have to
| | 01:16 |
have first created the text anchor.
And to link to a paragraph style, you
| | 01:20 |
have to first create and apply the
paragraph style to the text that you want
| | 01:24 |
to reference.
Now, I've already created and
| | 01:28 |
consistently applied paragraph styles to
all the text in this document.
| | 01:33 |
The text that I want to reference is the
chapter number.
| | 01:36 |
So, I’ll locate the chapter number
paragraph style, over here on the left side.
| | 01:42 |
There it is.
I'll just click it and notice that all
| | 01:44 |
the text to which this style is applied
appears at the right side of the dialog box.
| | 01:50 |
So, I'll just reference Chapter Three.
And if I move this dialog box to the
| | 01:54 |
right, you'll notice that the
cross-reference has already been inserted.
| | 01:59 |
Now, what if the text that you want to
reference is located within another
| | 02:03 |
InDesign document?
If so, make sure that document is
| | 02:07 |
currently opened.
You can then select the document name
| | 02:10 |
from this menu here, and then locate the
text that you want to reference.
| | 02:15 |
If the document isn't already open, you
can click Browse to locate and open it.
| | 02:21 |
All right.
This cross-reference isn't appearing in
| | 02:24 |
the exact format that I'd like to use.
So, I'll go ahead and modify it.
| | 02:28 |
I could use one of InDesign's predefined
cross-reference formats, which are
| | 02:32 |
located in this menu here, but none of
these formats are actually suitable for
| | 02:36 |
what I want.
So, I'm going to go ahead and make my own
| | 02:41 |
custom format by clicking this pencil
icon here.
| | 02:45 |
The text located here within quotation
marks is a building block that inserts
| | 02:50 |
the four paragraph text to which this
specified style is applied.
| | 02:56 |
And here's the building block for the
page number.
| | 03:01 |
Now, since this cross reference is for an
ebook, I don't actually want to include a
| | 03:05 |
page number because this page number
won't exactly correspond to the page
| | 03:08 |
number that the reader would see in the
ebook reader.
| | 03:13 |
So, I'll just delete this building block
and the words on page.
| | 03:18 |
I also want to delete the quotation marks
around this full paragraph building block.
| | 03:23 |
And I'd like to say, for more information
see chapter, followed by the number.
| | 03:28 |
So, I'll go ahead and type that in.
For more information, see chapter, space.
| | 03:34 |
And then the building block will insert
the chapter number.
| | 03:40 |
I'll go ahead and save this and click OK.
And now, you can see the cross-reference
| | 03:45 |
has been updated.
I'll go ahead and click OK and let's
| | 03:52 |
export this as an EPUB file now.
From the File > Export For > EPUB.
| | 04:00 |
I'll go ahead and send this to the
Desktop and you click Save.
| | 04:05 |
Check my settings, everything is set up
properly, so I can export it.
| | 04:14 |
And if I browse to Chapter One, you can
see there's my cross-reference it has
| | 04:18 |
been converted to a hyperlink.
So, if I click it, I'm taken immediately
| | 04:22 |
to Chapter Three.
So, that's all there is to it.
| | 04:26 |
Simply insert cross-references and
they're automatically converted to
| | 04:30 |
hyperlinks when you export your document
as an EPUB file.
| | 04:35 |
There's just one last thing that you
should be aware of.
| | 04:38 |
Unfortunately, InDesign CS5, currently
has a bug that creates broken hyperlinks
| | 04:43 |
in an EPUB file.
When you select the option, Use First
| | 04:46 |
Level Entries As Chapter Breaks.
Let me show you what I mean.
| | 04:50 |
I'll go ahead and export this again.
(BLANK_AUDIO).
| | 04:58 |
And in the contents section, I'll select
use first level entries as chapter break
| | 05:02 |
which will break up this entire document
into multiple XHTML files within the EPUB file.
| | 05:10 |
Now, when I select that option, this
hyperlink appears valid.
| | 05:14 |
But when I click on it, it just doesn't
work.
| | 05:17 |
This bug also effects EPUB files that are
exported from an InDesign book file.
| | 05:23 |
Now, this is currently a bug in version
7.0.0 to 7.0.2.
| | 05:28 |
So, hopefully, Adobe will have a fix for
this by the time you view this video.
| | 05:35 |
But until Adobe fixes it, if you're
creating an ebook that requires
| | 05:40 |
hyperlinks, I recommend using either
InDesign CS4 or setting up a single
| | 05:46 |
InDesign document for your entire book.
| | 05:52 |
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Embedding fonts| 00:00 |
InDesign has a handy feature that allows
you to imbed fonts into an ePub file.
| | 00:06 |
By embedding the fonts you've used in the
layout, you can be sure that the text in
| | 00:10 |
your ebook is displayed in the same font.
In this lesson, I'm going to show you how
| | 00:16 |
to embed fonts into an ePub file, using
InDesign CS5.
| | 00:20 |
The first thing that you need to do, is
consistently apply paragraph styles and
| | 00:25 |
character styles to all the text in your
document, because InDesign will only
| | 00:29 |
embed the fonts that are defined within a
style.
| | 00:33 |
In addition, the styles must be applied
to some text in your document.
| | 00:38 |
If you haven't applied one of the styles,
the font that it uses won't get embedded
| | 00:42 |
into the EPUB file.
In this document, I've already
| | 00:46 |
consistently applied paragraph styles to
all the text.
| | 00:51 |
I've also applied a couple of character
styles.
| | 00:54 |
I've applied Italic to this word here,
Bold to this word, and then Bold Italic
| | 00:58 |
to this word here.
I'd also like to point out that my
| | 01:03 |
paragraph styles, are only using open
type fonts.
| | 01:08 |
This is because InDesign, we'll only
embed Open Type Fonts, and most True Type
| | 01:12 |
Fonts, but Post Script Fonts cannot be
embedded.
| | 01:17 |
Fortunately, InDesign makes it really
easy to identify one font format from another.
| | 01:23 |
If you click on the Font menu, you'll see
an Icon, to the left side of each font name.
| | 01:29 |
If you see this Italic O, that indicates
that this is an Open Type Font, the
| | 01:33 |
Double T's indicates that that is a True
Type Font.
| | 01:37 |
And then, if you ever see this lower case
letter a, that indicates that this is a
| | 01:42 |
Post Script Font.
So, you don't want to use those fonts
| | 01:46 |
within your design, if you want to embed
that Font into the ePub file.
| | 01:51 |
Alright.
I'll go ahead and Export this Layout as
| | 01:53 |
an ePub file.
From the File menu, I'll choose Export
| | 01:57 |
For and then ePub.
I want to View this eBook after Exporting
| | 02:02 |
it, so I'll click this option.
And then in the Contents Section, I want
| | 02:06 |
to deselect Preserve Local Overrides.
But I definitely want to include the
| | 02:11 |
Embedable Fonts, so I'll leave this
option selected and I can click Export.
| | 02:19 |
And, in order to fit, a little bit more
text within the page, I'll decrease the
| | 02:22 |
Font size.
And, as you can see, I've successfully
| | 02:26 |
embedded the font into this E-pub file.
If I moved it to the side, so that you
| | 02:31 |
can View the InDesign layout at the same
time, you can see, that this E-pub file
| | 02:35 |
is using the same fonts as the InDesign
document.
| | 02:40 |
However, take a closer look at the italic
word, the bold word and the bold italic word.
| | 02:48 |
I'm noticing that this italic word is not
being displayed in the correct font.
| | 02:53 |
It's actually being displayed in the
default font of Adobe Digital Editions.
| | 02:57 |
The bold word doesn't appear bold at all,
and the bold italic word is also being
| | 03:01 |
displayed in the default font.
So, why is that happening?
| | 03:07 |
In order to explain why, I'll go back to
InDesign, and I'll double click the
| | 03:10 |
Character Style that's applied to each of
these words.
| | 03:14 |
So, I'll double-click Italic, and I'd
like you to notice that the only
| | 03:18 |
formatting this Character Style defines
is Italic, which you can see here in the
| | 03:22 |
Style Settings Overview.
So, if you want to embed a font, that's
| | 03:28 |
being used by a character style, not only
do you want to define the font style, you
| | 03:33 |
also want to define the font family.
So I'm going to type in Adobe, Garamond
| | 03:42 |
Pro, and click OK.
For the Bold Character Style I need to do
| | 03:47 |
the same thing.
Adobe Garamond Pro, and then the same
| | 03:52 |
goes for Bold Italic.
So by explicity defining the font family
| | 03:59 |
in the font style, I can be sure, that
these fonts will now be properly embedded
| | 04:05 |
into the ePUB file.
I'll go ahead and Export that again.
| | 04:13 |
I'll Overwrite the other one, and click
Export.
| | 04:19 |
Decrease the font size so you can see
more of the text, and there it is!
| | 04:23 |
As you can see, this Italic word is now
being displayed in the correct font.
| | 04:29 |
The Bold word now appears in the correct
font, and so does the Bold Italic word.
| | 04:34 |
Now one thing to keep in mind when
designing an ebook, is that not all fonts
| | 04:38 |
look good on screen.
If you want to embed a particular font, I
| | 04:42 |
highly reccomend that you test it on a
variety of different ebook readers,
| | 04:45 |
before using it.
Alright, so now that you know how to
| | 04:50 |
embed fonts into an ePUB file, I should
warn you that not all e-book readers
| | 04:54 |
actually support embedded fonts.
In fact the only e-book readers that
| | 05:00 |
currently support embedded fonts, are
Adobe Digital Editions, the Sony Reader
| | 05:04 |
and other Adobe supported reading
devices.
| | 05:09 |
For a complete list of the reading
devices, that are compatible with Adobe's
| | 05:13 |
platform for e-Books, go ahead and visit
this website.
| | 05:19 |
That's
blogs.adobe.com/digitalpublishing/supported-devices.
| | 05:25 |
This will give you a complete list of all
the Adobe-supported devices.
| | 05:30 |
Other eBook readers that aren't on this
list, such as the Amazon Kindle and the
| | 05:35 |
Apple iPad, don't support embedded fonts.
So, unless you are specificly targeting
| | 05:42 |
an Adobe compatible eBook reader, I don't
actually recommend you embed fonts into
| | 05:46 |
an ePUB file.
This way, the eBooks that you create,
| | 05:50 |
will actually be compatible with a wider
range of eBook readers.
| | 05:54 |
Hopefully more eBook readers in the
future, will support embedded fonts.
| | 05:59 |
We're really just at the beginning of the
eBook revolution, so I imagine that as
| | 06:02 |
eBook readers continually improve, we'll
be seeing more and more support for
| | 06:06 |
embedded fonts.
| | 06:09 |
| | Collapse this transcript |
|
|
5. Exporting GraphicsOptimizing graphics for the EPUB format| 00:02 |
If you're creating a e-book that contains
images and graphic, it's important to
| | 00:06 |
prepare them for optimum display on a
variety of different e-book readers.
| | 00:12 |
In this lesson, I'm going to give you
several best practices to follow when
| | 00:16 |
laying out images in a document that will
exported as an EPUB file.
| | 00:21 |
There's an abundance of e-book readers
available on the market today.
| | 00:25 |
They come in a variety of different
sizes.
| | 00:28 |
Some people read e-books on their mobile
phone, others read them on a dedicated
| | 00:32 |
e-book reader, such as the Sony Reader,
the Barnes and Noble NOOK, or the Amazon Kindle.
| | 00:38 |
And others read e-books on the Apple iPad
or even a regular computer.
| | 00:44 |
As you can imagine, it's not actually
possible to predict which e-book readers
| | 00:47 |
people will read your e-books on.
So, let me demonstrate some best
| | 00:52 |
practices to follow that will ensure that
the images and graphics in your e-books
| | 00:56 |
will display well across a variety of
different e-book readers.
| | 01:02 |
The first thing that I like to do is
convert the measurement system to either
| | 01:06 |
pixels or points.
With InDesign CS5, you can use the pixels
| | 01:10 |
measurement system to change the
measurement system.
| | 01:15 |
Simply position your pointer where the
rulers, the horizontal and vertical
| | 01:19 |
rulers, converge, here, at the top left
part of the document window, and then, right-click.
| | 01:27 |
And from this menu, choose Pixels.
Now, if you're using InDesign CS4, the
| | 01:31 |
pixels measurement system isn't
available, so instead you would use points.
| | 01:38 |
Either way, you get the same results.
Since I'm working with InDesign CS5, I'll
| | 01:42 |
go ahead and select Pixels.
So, by using either the points or pixels
| | 01:47 |
measurement system, you can more
accurately predict the size of your
| | 01:51 |
images in an e-book.
So, I'll go ahead and scale this image to
| | 01:55 |
a size that looks good on various e-book
readers.
| | 01:59 |
But, what size should an image be when
there are so many e-book readers available?
| | 02:04 |
Well, you don't want to make the images
and graphics too small, because they
| | 02:08 |
won't display well on large screen sizes.
You also don't want to make them too
| | 02:13 |
large, because that will increase the
size of your e-book file and large
| | 02:17 |
e-books don't perform well on reading
devices with limited processing power.
| | 02:22 |
Fortunately, most dedicated e-book
readers have a screen resolution of 600
| | 02:27 |
by 800 pixels, so I recommend using that
screen resolution as the basis for sizing
| | 02:33 |
your images.
Let's take a look at the current
| | 02:38 |
dimensions of this image.
I'll select it and take note of the width
| | 02:41 |
and height of the image up here in the
Control Panel.
| | 02:45 |
The average image should be between 300
pixels and 600 pixels wide and the height
| | 02:50 |
of the image should proportional to the
width of the image.
| | 02:56 |
So this image will display well on most
e-book readers.
| | 03:00 |
Now, an image that's 300 pixels wide will
fill exactly half of the screen on most
| | 03:05 |
e-book readers.
So, I'll go ahead and resize this image
| | 03:10 |
to 300 pixels wide.
I'll first click this icon here, which
| | 03:14 |
will constrain the proportions when I
resize the image, and now, I'll just type
| | 03:18 |
in 300 pixels here.
And press Enter or Return to apply that.
| | 03:24 |
And now, I'll fit this image to the
frame.
| | 03:27 |
So, to do that, I'll go up to the Object
menu, choose Fitting, and then Fit
| | 03:32 |
Content Proportionally.
And now, I'll view this document at
| | 03:39 |
exactly 100%.
Now, I can be sure that this image will
| | 03:43 |
appear at exactly these dimensions in the
EPUB file.
| | 03:48 |
I'll go ahead and export an EPUB file,
from the File menu, I'll choose Export
| | 03:53 |
For, and then EPUB.
I'll send this to the Desktop.
| | 03:59 |
I'd like to view this e-book after
exporting it, so I'll click this option,
| | 04:03 |
and then, in the Images section of the
dialogue box, I want to make sure and
| | 04:07 |
select the formatted option.
With the formatted option selected, the
| | 04:14 |
exported images are reformatted to the
size to which you've scaled them in your
| | 04:18 |
InDesign document.
The images are also converted to the RGB
| | 04:24 |
color mode and their resolution is
changed to 72 pixels per inch, which
| | 04:28 |
helps to reduce the overall file size of
the final EPUB file.
| | 04:34 |
This option also preserves any InDesign
formatting that you've applied to your
| | 04:39 |
image frames, such as a stroke, a fill,
any rotation, or even cropping that
| | 04:44 |
you've done.
I'll go ahead and click Export.
| | 04:53 |
And, as you can see, this image is
exactly the same size in the EPUB file as
| | 04:57 |
it is in my InDesign layout.
So as you can see, it's really quite simple.
| | 05:02 |
Just make sure you're working in either
the Pixels or Points measurement system.
| | 05:08 |
Scale the image to the size that you want
it to be in the eBook reader, and then
| | 05:12 |
when you export the EPUB file, make sure
that the formatted option is selected in
| | 05:16 |
the images category of the export dialog
box.
| | 05:21 |
All right, I'll go back to InDesign, and
this time I'll crop this image.
| | 05:29 |
I'll also rotate it just to show you that
when I export this EPUB file with that
| | 05:36 |
formatted option selected, that
formatting is preserved.
| | 05:44 |
But watch what happens if I export this
without the formatted options selected.
| | 05:57 |
All that formatting is lost.
The image is exported 100% of its
| | 06:02 |
original size.
So it's way too big to even fit within
| | 06:07 |
the page and most of it is being cropped
out.
| | 06:12 |
So as you can see, that little formatted
option is quite important.
| | 06:17 |
All right.
So , now you know how wide a normal image
| | 06:20 |
should appear.
But what about full screen images?
| | 06:25 |
I'll go ahead and undo this, Command or
Ctrl+Z.
| | 06:29 |
Full screen images should be about 600
pixels wide by 800 pixels tall, which is
| | 06:34 |
exactly the resolution of most dedicated
e-book readers.
| | 06:40 |
I'll go ahead and resize this image to
those dimensions.
| | 06:43 |
I'll first fit the page into the window
by pressing Command or Ctrl+0.
| | 06:49 |
And then, I'm going to deselect this link
icon so that the proportions are not constrained.
| | 06:56 |
And then, I can type in those exact
dimensions, 600 by 800.
| | 07:03 |
I'll press Enter or Return to apply that.
I'll move this image within the center of
| | 07:09 |
the page, and now, I'd like to fill the
frame with the content by going up to the
| | 07:14 |
Object menu, choosing Fitting, and then,
Fill Frame Proportionally.
| | 07:22 |
All right, I'll go ahead and export this
as an EPUB file.
| | 07:28 |
I'll replace the existing file.
And in the Images category, I'll make
| | 07:32 |
sure and select the formatted option.
I'll click Export.
| | 07:37 |
Now, I'm working on a resolution that's
wider than it is tall, so this entire
| | 07:41 |
image isn't going to fit on the page, but
on a typical dedicated e-book reader,
| | 07:46 |
this image would display well.
In fact, on an iPad, an image that's 600
| | 07:53 |
by 860 pixels will perfectly fit the
entire screen.
| | 08:00 |
I'll switch over to a sample e-book that
I created specifically for the iPad.
| | 08:05 |
When I set up this image that we're
looking at here in InDesign, I made it
| | 08:09 |
exactly 600 by 860 pixels, and as you can
see, it perfectly fits the width and the
| | 08:13 |
height of the screen on the iPad.
And when you flip the iPad horizontally,
| | 08:20 |
the image still fits the screen.
And then, for both of these half page
| | 08:27 |
images, I made them 600 by 430 pixels.
I didn't want to make them too tall,
| | 08:33 |
because I wanted to allow ample text to
appear on the page with the images.
| | 08:38 |
Alright, so, now you know the optimal
size that your images should be scaled to
| | 08:42 |
and you understand the importance of
using that formatted option when
| | 08:46 |
exporting an EPUB file.
So now, I'll go ahead and explain how the
| | 08:52 |
other Image Export options work.
I'll switch back to InDesign and I'll go
| | 08:57 |
ahead and export an EPUB file.
So in addition to the formatted option,
| | 09:06 |
InDesign provides several other options
for determining higher images or exported
| | 09:11 |
when the EPUB file was created.
Now generally, you don't need to be so
| | 09:16 |
concerned with these options because
InDesign actually does a good job
| | 09:20 |
choosing the right options for you.
However, let me briefly explain how these work.
| | 09:28 |
So, in the Image Conversion menu, you
have a couple of choices.
| | 09:34 |
You can choose whether the optimized
images are converted to GIF or JPEG, but
| | 09:38 |
if you choose automatic, InDesign will
determine which format to use for each
| | 09:42 |
image in your layout.
The GIF file format uses a limited color
| | 09:49 |
palette that can't exceed 256 colors.
So it's really best used for logos and
| | 09:57 |
simple graphics.
The JPEG format is best for images and illustrations.
| | 10:03 |
If your InDesign document contains a
combination of both logos and images, I
| | 10:08 |
highly recommend that you choose
Automatic, otherwise, you can specify a
| | 10:13 |
specific format if you like.
So, if a GIF file is created, InDesign
| | 10:20 |
will use these options here in the GIF
options area to determine how the GIF
| | 10:25 |
file is created.
There are really just two main options in
| | 10:30 |
this area.
The Palette menu and the Interlace option.
| | 10:35 |
So,the options in the Palette menu let
you determine how you want InDesign to
| | 10:40 |
handle colors when optimizing GIF images,
and if you select the Interlace option,
| | 10:45 |
it will speed up the download time of GIF
images.
| | 10:52 |
Or in other words, it'll potentially
speed up the time in which the image
| | 10:55 |
loads on an e-book reader, but this
option also will increase the file size a little.
| | 11:02 |
Now, in my testing, I don't really notice
a difference between this option being
| | 11:06 |
selected and not selected, so I generally
leave it deselected.
| | 11:11 |
I'm mainly concerned with the JPEG
options.
| | 11:15 |
So, for image quality, I normally choose
High, because I like high quality JPEG images.
| | 11:23 |
Now, in my testing I've discovered that
there really isn't a difference between
| | 11:28 |
High and Maximum.
When comparing the difference between
| | 11:33 |
images that were exported with the
Maximum setting and the High setting, I
| | 11:36 |
discovered that the High setting gave me
just as good of results and the images
| | 11:40 |
were slightly smaller in size.
Within the Format Nethod menu, there are
| | 11:47 |
two options, Baseline and Progressive.
Now, I haven't really noticed a
| | 11:52 |
difference between these two settings.
So I just use the Default option.
| | 11:57 |
Alright.
I'll go ahead and Cancel this.
| | 12:00 |
One of the questions that I frequently
get is whether or not you should use
| | 12:03 |
color or grayscale images in your
e-books, since many e-book readers have
| | 12:07 |
grayscale screens.
Now, I actually recommend that you use
| | 12:12 |
color images whenever possible.
Although, many of the current e-book
| | 12:17 |
readers have grayscale displays, it's
actually a good idea to use color images
| | 12:21 |
for two main reasons.
So for one future, e-book readers will
| | 12:27 |
most likely have color displays.
So, the e-books that you create today
| | 12:32 |
won't have to updated later on.
And secondly, some e-book reading devices
| | 12:39 |
such as the Apple iPad, the iPhone, the
iPad Touch, and various smartphones
| | 12:44 |
actually support color images.
Now, I've just walked you through the
| | 12:50 |
process of exporting images from InDesign
CS5.
| | 12:54 |
I'd like to point out that InDesign CS4
actually has one other option that
| | 12:58 |
InDesign CS5 doesn't have.
So, I'm going to switch over to InDesign CS4.
| | 13:06 |
And from the File menu, choose Export for
Digital Auditions to create an ePUB file.
| | 13:16 |
And in Images area, I'd like you to
notice that there's a Copy Images menu.
| | 13:21 |
So this menu isn't available on InDesigns
CS5.
| | 13:24 |
It has two options, Original and
Optimized.
| | 13:30 |
If you choose Original, the original
images are exported to the EPUB file.
| | 13:38 |
Now, keep in mind that when producing a
document in InDesign, you typically use
| | 13:41 |
high resolution images.
So if you try to use the same images for
| | 13:46 |
an e-book, they'll most likely be way too
big.
| | 13:50 |
And large images consume a lot of memory
and they actually take longer to draw on screen.
| | 13:56 |
If an image is too large, you'll actually
encounter problems on e-book readers that
| | 14:00 |
have limited memory and processing power.
So I highly recommend that if you're
| | 14:07 |
working with InDesign CS4, choose
Optimize and let InDesign automatically
| | 14:12 |
export an optimized version of the images
for you that display well on most e-book readers.
| | 14:20 |
All of the other options in this category
are the same as they are in InDesign CS5.
| | 14:27 |
All right, now, I've just covered a lot
of material.
| | 14:31 |
But, let me just summarize the main
points that you need to remember.
| | 14:35 |
First of all, work in the Points
Measurement System or the Pixels
| | 14:38 |
Measurement System.
Resize your images to the size that you
| | 14:42 |
would like to see them in an e-book
reader.
| | 14:46 |
For average images, they should be
between 300 and 600 pixels wide.
| | 14:51 |
For full screen images, they should be
600 pixels wide by about 800 pixels tall.
| | 14:57 |
And then, when you export the EPUB file,
make sure and select the formatted option
| | 15:02 |
in the Images category, and then, I like
to choose Automatic for image conversion,
| | 15:07 |
and for the image quality, I select High.
And that's all there is to it.
| | 15:14 |
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Working with InDesign artwork| 00:02 |
When you're exporting EPUB file from
InDesign, any artwork that was created
| | 00:06 |
with InDesign's various drawing tools, is
not actually exported to the EPUB file.
| | 00:12 |
So in this lesson, I'm going to show you
how to work around this issue.
| | 00:17 |
I'll use the Rectangle tool to draw a
simple shape.
| | 00:20 |
And I'll fill it with a color.
And now, I'll export the EPUB file.
| | 00:29 |
And as you can see, that object was not
exported to the EPUB file.
| | 00:34 |
So, in order to ensure that it is
exported, I need to convert it to an
| | 00:38 |
external image.
And that's easily done with the help of Illustrator.
| | 00:44 |
So, I'm going to copy this object, Cmd or
Ctrl + C, I'll switch over to Adobe
| | 00:49 |
Illustrator, create a new document, and
paste that graphic right into this
| | 00:54 |
document, Cmd or Ctrl + V.
Now, I can save this as an image.
| | 01:03 |
I'll just call it Square and save it to
the Desktop.
| | 01:09 |
Now, I can switch back over to InDesign
and import that image.
| | 01:14 |
I'll delete this one.
And from the File menu, choose Place.
| | 01:19 |
I'll select the image, and before I
actually import it, I want to make sure
| | 01:23 |
and select this option here, Show Import
Options.
| | 01:28 |
That way, when I click Open, I'm
presented with additional options, which
| | 01:32 |
allow me to determine how I want that
image imported.
| | 01:37 |
I want to make sure that Bounding Box is
selected from this Crop To menu.
| | 01:41 |
That way, only the object within the
Illustrator file is actually imported
| | 01:46 |
into InDesign.
I also want to make sure that Transparent
| | 01:50 |
Background is selected so that any
transparency in the graphic is honored
| | 01:53 |
when I place the file into InDesign.
Alright, I can click OK now, and place
| | 01:59 |
the file.
So, if I open up the Links panel, you can
| | 02:04 |
see that this is an external image, and
when I export this file as an EPUB file,
| | 02:10 |
I can be sure that that graphic will be
exported.
| | 02:17 |
Now, what if you had a page that was full
of an assortment of different frames,
| | 02:22 |
both text frames and various graphics
that were drawn with InDesign's drawing tools?
| | 02:31 |
And you want to make sure that the entire
page becomes one single image?
| | 02:36 |
Rather than converting that entire page
to an Illustrator file, you can use
| | 02:41 |
InDesign instead.
You can actually import InDesign files
| | 02:45 |
within InDesign.
So, I would create a new InDesign
| | 02:48 |
document that matches the same dimensions
as the document I'm working with.
| | 02:55 |
And then, I would copy all of the objects
from this page, paste them on to the new
| | 03:00 |
page, I'll choose Edit > Paste and Place
to paste them into the same xy position
| | 03:05 |
that I copied them from.
And then, I'll save this.
| | 03:11 |
So, let's say this was the cover for my
book.
| | 03:15 |
I would then switch back to the document
that contains my book.
| | 03:20 |
And then either delete all the objects on
this page, or move them to the paste board.
| | 03:25 |
Any objects on the paste board will not
be exported to the EPUB file.
| | 03:29 |
And now I can place that file, that I
just created, called Cover right into
| | 03:34 |
this InDesign document and make sure from
the Crop To menu that Page Bounding box
| | 03:39 |
is selected so that the entire page is
imported and then click OK.
| | 03:48 |
So now, this InDesign file is an external
image and when I export this as an EPUB
| | 03:54 |
file, I can be sure that it's exported.
And there it is.
| | 04:02 |
Another great reason to create an
external InDesign file, is that it's
| | 04:06 |
really easy to edit this.
If at any time I need to make changes to
| | 04:12 |
this page, all I need to do is hold the
Option key or the Alt key and then
| | 04:15 |
double-click the image.
That opens the original document backup
| | 04:22 |
inside of InDesign.
I can then make any changes that I want.
| | 04:27 |
Save this file, Cmd or Ctrl + S, switch
back to the original document, and
| | 04:31 |
InDesign automatically updates the new
changes.
| | 04:37 |
So, by treating InDesign files as placed
images, you still get the benefit of
| | 04:41 |
working with InDesign to create the
images, and you can be sure that they're
| | 04:44 |
exported to the EPUB file.
| | 04:48 |
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Setting up an ebook cover page| 00:02 |
In this lesson, I'm going to show you how
to set up the cover page, for an e-book.
| | 00:06 |
This sample book cover was created with
two frames, a text frame that contains
| | 00:10 |
the title of the book, and a graphics
frame that contains the cover image.
| | 00:16 |
Also notice that I've applied a Drop
Shadow to the text.
| | 00:20 |
Alright, let's see what happens when I
export this as an e-book file from the
| | 00:25 |
file menu.
I will choose Export for and then EPUB, I
| | 00:29 |
will send this to the desktop and click
Export.
| | 00:35 |
Notice that the book title is missing.
It was actually placed below the image.
| | 00:41 |
So if I scroll to the next page, you'll
see my book title.
| | 00:46 |
As you can see, if your book cover is
composed of an assortment of text and
| | 00:50 |
graphics frames, all the design elements
end up flowing in a linear direction in
| | 00:54 |
the EPUB file.
Also notice that the formatting of my
| | 00:59 |
text was discarded.
The correct font isn't being used.
| | 01:04 |
The color of the text is black instead of
white and the Drop Shadow is completely missing.
| | 01:10 |
So to ensure that my book cover appears
correctly in the EPUB file, I need to
| | 01:14 |
convert the cover to and external image.
Fortunately, InDesign allows you to place
| | 01:20 |
an InDesign document within another
InDesign document.
| | 01:25 |
So, that's exactly what I am going to do.
I'll start by creating a new InDesign
| | 01:30 |
document, and I'll make the dimensions of
this new document the same as my other
| | 01:35 |
file, which is 6 by 9 inches, and click
OK.
| | 01:41 |
Now, I'll go back to my first cover file,
and select both of these frames and cut
| | 01:46 |
them, Command or Ctrl+X.
I'll switch back to my new document, and
| | 01:52 |
from the Edit menu, I'm going to choose
Paste in Place.
| | 01:56 |
This will paste the graphics into the
same location that I copied them from.
| | 02:01 |
I go ahead and Save this file, I will
call it Cover.
| | 02:04 |
Now, I can close this file and in my
original document, and now I am going to
| | 02:09 |
place that cover document that I just
created within this InDesign document by
| | 02:14 |
choosing file Place, selecting that cover
document, and opening it.
| | 02:22 |
Now, I'll just position my pointer up
here at the top left corner of the page
| | 02:26 |
and click once to place it.
So next, I need to make sure that my
| | 02:31 |
image is at the optimal width and height.
Ideally, your cover image should be
| | 02:36 |
around 600 pixels wide by 800 pixels
tall.
| | 02:41 |
Let's find out what the dimensions of
this image are.
| | 02:43 |
I'll switch the measurement system to
pixels by right-clicking up here on the
| | 02:48 |
top left corner of the page where the
rulers meet.
| | 02:53 |
I'll right-click that, and from this
menu, I'll choose Pixels.
| | 02:56 |
Now, if you're working with InDesign CS4,
you can choose Points and get the same results.
| | 03:04 |
So this image is 432 pixels by 648 pixels
tall, and that's really too small, so I
| | 03:10 |
need to increase the size to about 600 by
800 pixels.
| | 03:18 |
But the size of this document is also to
small, so I will first change the
| | 03:22 |
dimensions of this document by going to
the File menu, and choosing Document Setup.
| | 03:30 |
I will change the dimensions to 600 by
800 pixels.
| | 03:34 |
And now, I can easily resize this
graphic.
| | 03:37 |
I'll position it at the top left-hand
corner of the page and while holding the
| | 03:42 |
Shift and Command keys down or the Shift
and Ctrl keys on a PC.
| | 03:48 |
I'll drag the bottom right corner down
and I'll fit the height of this image to
| | 03:53 |
the page, so it doesn't exactly fit the
entire width, but that's okay.
| | 04:00 |
I can even center it if I like.
Alright, so now, I'll go ahead and export
| | 04:04 |
this as an EPUB file.
I'll replace the existing file, and this
| | 04:12 |
time, I want to visit the Images
Category, because I want to make sure
| | 04:16 |
that the image quality is set at high.
And now I'll click Export.
| | 04:24 |
So, when I exported the EPUB file this
time, that imported InDesign document was
| | 04:29 |
converted to a JPEG image.
Now, I'm working on a screen resolution
| | 04:34 |
that's wider than it is tall, so that's
why the entire image isn't fitting on my screen.
| | 04:40 |
But, in a typical dedicated e-book
reader, you would be able to see the rest
| | 04:43 |
of the image.
I'd like you to notice that this image is
| | 04:47 |
left-aligned, so if you would like to
center the image on the page, you can do that.
| | 04:54 |
I'll switch back to InDesign, I'm going
to cut this graphic by pressing Command
| | 04:59 |
or Ctrl+X, and I'll create a text frame
that's the same size as the page.
| | 05:08 |
And notice that my cursor is blinking
within that text frame.
| | 05:11 |
So now, I'm going to paste a graphic,
Command or Ctrl+V, within the text frame
| | 05:17 |
and I'll go ahead and center this.
So InDesign is treating this image as if
| | 05:24 |
it were text.
I can center align the image, and then,
| | 05:28 |
create a paragraph style that I apply to
that paragraph.
| | 05:33 |
I'll hold the Option key or the Alt key
on the PC as I click the Create New Style
| | 05:37 |
button at the bottom of the paragraph
styles panel.
| | 05:42 |
I'll call this my cover image and apply
it to the selection and then click OK.
| | 05:49 |
And that's all there is to it.
So now, when I export this EPUB file, the
| | 05:54 |
image will be centered on the screen.
All right, I'll go back to InDesign,
| | 06:00 |
because there's one last important tip
that I'd like to give you.
| | 06:06 |
Notice that for my cover, I created a
single document, and then, this document
| | 06:10 |
is part of an InDesign book file.
Since the EPUB format does not define
| | 06:15 |
page structure, all the content flows
together in one continuous linear stream,
| | 06:20 |
which can be problematic for an e-book
cover.
| | 06:25 |
Because the text from the following page
can run in to the cover image.
| | 06:31 |
So, in order to avoid this problem, I
created a separate InDesign document for
| | 06:36 |
my cover image.
And then, I combined it with the other
| | 06:40 |
documents with the e-book using InDesign
book file.
| | 06:45 |
That way, each one of these documents
becomes a separate HTML file in the EPUB
| | 06:49 |
document and the text below the cover
image will not run into it.
| | 06:56 |
Now, what if all the content for your
e-book is contained within a single
| | 07:00 |
InDesign document?
Well, if you're using InDesign CS4,
| | 07:04 |
you'll want to separate each chapter into
a separate InDesign document and use a
| | 07:08 |
book file to combine the documents
together as a single publication as I've
| | 07:12 |
done here.
But if you're using InDesign CS5, you can
| | 07:17 |
keep all the content within a single
InDesign document, and then specify the
| | 07:21 |
Export option that will break up the
content of your document into individual
| | 07:26 |
chapters when you export the EPUB file.
I'll go ahead and open up another
| | 07:32 |
InDesign document.
This is the same e-book, but it's
| | 07:36 |
contained within a single InDesign
document.
| | 07:42 |
I'll replace the cover elements here on
the first page with that image that I set
| | 07:46 |
up in the other document.
So I'll just copy this entire text frame,
| | 07:52 |
Command or Ctrl+C, and I'll just paste it
into this document.
| | 07:58 |
Now, that's way too big to fit into the
document dimensions, but that's okay,
| | 08:02 |
because InDesign will actually export the
entire image to the e-book.
| | 08:07 |
So in order to ensure that content does
not run into the bottom of the cover
| | 08:12 |
image in my e-book, I need to apply a
First Level Paragraph style to this heading.
| | 08:21 |
So notice I've applied Section Title to
this heading, and then in the Layout
| | 08:26 |
menu, within the Table of Contents
Styles, I created a TOC style called
| | 08:30 |
navigation guide.
I'll go ahead and double-click that to
| | 08:36 |
open it up, and since the section title
paragraph style has been specified as a
| | 08:41 |
level one entry, I can use this when I
export the EPUB file.
| | 08:50 |
In the Contents section, I just need to
make sure and select use First Level
| | 08:54 |
Entries as Chapter Breaks.
And, since that's a First Level Entry, a
| | 08:59 |
new chapter break will occur right there
preventing the text from running into the
| | 09:04 |
cover image.
I'll go ahead and click Export.
| | 09:10 |
So that's another way of ensuring that
your e-book cover appears on its own page
| | 09:14 |
in an e-book reader.
Alright, so, now you know how to set up
| | 09:18 |
the cover page for an e-book.
You understand how important it is to
| | 09:22 |
create an external image for your book
cover, which you then place into your
| | 09:26 |
book layout.
It's also important to make sure that
| | 09:31 |
your cover image is around 600 pixels
wide by 800 pixels tall.
| | 09:35 |
And, to make sure that the cover loads as
a separate page in an e-book reader,
| | 09:39 |
place it in its own e-book document.
Or, use the InDesign CS5 feature that
| | 09:44 |
creates Chapter Breaks according to the
First Level Entries in your TOC style.
| | 09:50 |
| | Collapse this transcript |
|
|
6. Adding the Final TouchesCreating a table of contents| 00:02 |
It's really important for every ebook to
have a table of contents or a TOC.
| | 00:07 |
In fact, there are 2 types of TOC's that
can be included in an ebook.
| | 00:11 |
A traditional TOC that's located at the
beginning of the book, such as this one
| | 00:15 |
here, and a navigation guide that often
appears as a menu in an ebook reader.
| | 00:21 |
In Adobe Digital Editions, the navigation
guide is located on this panel over here
| | 00:26 |
at the left side.
In this lesson, I'm going to show you how
| | 00:30 |
to create a traditional table of
contents.
| | 00:33 |
Notice that each one of these entries is
a clickable hyperlink.
| | 00:37 |
So, I can click in entry and I'm taken
quickly to that chapter.
| | 00:41 |
All right.
I'll switch over to InDesign and walk
| | 00:44 |
through the steps.
All of the documents for this ebook are
| | 00:48 |
part of a book file.
Each section and chapter is contained
| | 00:52 |
within its own InDesign document.
I also created a separate document for
| | 00:57 |
the table of contents because I want it
to appear on its own page in an EPUB file.
| | 01:03 |
I'll go ahead and open up all of these
documents.
| | 01:06 |
I'll select a cover.
And while holding the Shift key, I'll
| | 01:09 |
select a Chapter 5 document and then I'll
double-click anyone of these selected
| | 01:13 |
chapters to open up all of them.
I'll navigate to the contents document
| | 01:19 |
and locate the page that the table of
contents is on.
| | 01:23 |
Now, you might think to just create this
TOC with InDesign's table of contents feature.
| | 01:29 |
But if you do, it'll actually be
discarded when you convert the
| | 01:33 |
publication to an EPUB file.
So, you have to manually create the TOC instead.
| | 01:39 |
And I recommend using InDesign's Cross
References feature to create each entry
| | 01:43 |
in the TOC because they're automatically
converted to hyperlinks in the EPUB file.
| | 01:49 |
Creating a cross reference is actually
quite easy.
| | 01:52 |
Just make sure that you consistently
apply paragraph styles to all the text
| | 01:56 |
that you want to reference before you
attempt to create the cross references.
| | 02:02 |
Once you've done that, open up the
hyperlinks panel.
| | 02:04 |
By going up to Window > Interactive >
Hyperlinks.
| | 02:09 |
The Cross References section is located
at the bottom half of this panel.
| | 02:14 |
So, to create a cross reference, insert
your cursor where you would like the
| | 02:18 |
cross reference to appear.
I'll go ahead and delete this text here,
| | 02:23 |
since the entry will automatically be
inserted when I insert the cross reference.
| | 02:29 |
And now, I'll click the create new cross
reference button at the bottom of the
| | 02:32 |
hyperlinks panel.
So, in this dialog box, make sure that
| | 02:37 |
paragraph is selected in the Link To
menu.
| | 02:41 |
And then, specify the document that
contains the text you want to reference.
| | 02:46 |
I'll choose Section One.
And as you can see, it definitely speeds
| | 02:50 |
up the process of creating cross
references if you already have all the
| | 02:53 |
documents opened beforehand.
So next, you'll need to select a
| | 02:59 |
paragraph style, that's applied to the
text that you want to reference.
| | 03:03 |
And in this case, I want to locate the
Section Title Style.
| | 03:07 |
And now that I've selected it, notice
that all the text that this style is
| | 03:11 |
applied to, shows up at the right side of
the dialog box.
| | 03:16 |
And in this case, there's just one
paragraph in that entire document that
| | 03:19 |
had this style applied to it.
And it shows up here.
| | 03:23 |
So next, I want to format this cross
reference.
| | 03:26 |
InDesign provides several predefined
formats which are located here in this menu.
| | 03:33 |
Since I only want the full paragraph and
not the page number two appear on my
| | 03:37 |
ebook, I'll choose Full Paragraph.
I also want to make sure and choose
| | 03:41 |
Invisible Rectangle.Otherwise, a box will
appear around the entry.
| | 03:44 |
And now I can click OK.
So I just inserted the first entry.
| | 03:48 |
I'll go ahead and finish inserting the
rest of the entries, repeating those same steps.
| | 03:55 |
Now, you don't actually have to delete
the text because any selected text will
| | 04:01 |
be replaced with the inserted cross
reference.
| | 04:07 |
So, the text that I want to reference is
located in the Chapter 1 document and it
| | 04:12 |
has the style Chapter Name applied to it.
All the other settings were remembered
| | 04:18 |
from the last time and I'll click OK.
I'll do the same for chapter two.
| | 04:24 |
That's located in Chapter 2.
Again, the chapter name style is applied
| | 04:27 |
to it.
It's just a matter of repeating this
| | 04:31 |
process for each entry.
(BLANK_AUDIO).
| | 04:39 |
This entry is located within the Section
2 document (SOUND) and it has the Section
| | 04:44 |
Tiitle Style applied to it.
(SOUND).
| | 04:58 |
And just one more.
(SOUND).
| | 05:03 |
All right.
So, now I can export the EPUB file.
| | 05:07 |
I'll go ahead and save this document.
And to export from the book file, I need
| | 05:12 |
to go to Book Panel > Export for Digital
Editions.
| | 05:19 |
I'll send this to the Desktop and I'll
click Export.
| | 05:28 |
And here is the table of contents I just
created.
| | 05:30 |
Each one of these entries is a clickable
hyperlink.
| | 05:34 |
So, that's all there is to it.
Just insert cross references for each
| | 05:37 |
entry in the table of contents.
The text will be automatically generated
| | 05:41 |
for you and if you ever need to update
that text, the cross reference can be
| | 05:45 |
automatically updated to display the new
change.
| | 05:50 |
There's just one last thing that I'd like
to bring to your attention.
| | 05:53 |
Notice that I used InDesign CS4 to create
this ebook.
| | 05:57 |
Now, I could have used InDesign CS5 to
create the cross references as well.
| | 06:02 |
But unfortunately, InDesign CS5 currently
has a bug that creates broken hyperlinks
| | 06:07 |
in an EPUB file when you export from a
book file.
| | 06:11 |
Now, this is currently a bug in InDesign
CS5 Version 7.0.0 to 7.0.2.
| | 06:18 |
So, hopefully Adobe will have fixed it by
the time you view this video.
| | 06:26 |
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Creating a navigation guide| 00:02 |
The Navigation Guide is one of the most
important parts of an ebook because it
| | 00:05 |
allows a reader to quickly jump to a
specific locations within a book.
| | 00:11 |
It's essentially a table of contents for
an ebook and it often appears as a menu
| | 00:15 |
in an ebook reader.
In Adobe Digital Editions, the navigation
| | 00:20 |
guide appears on this panel at the left
side of the ebook.
| | 00:24 |
If I click one of these entries, I'm
quickly taken to that part of the book.
| | 00:28 |
In this lesson, I'm going to demonstrate
how to automatically generate a
| | 00:32 |
navigation guide when you export an EPUB
file from InDesign.
| | 00:37 |
I'll go ahead and switch over to
InDesign.
| | 00:39 |
And notice that all the documents for
this ebook are part of a book file.
| | 00:44 |
Each section and chapter is contained
within its own InDesign document.
| | 00:49 |
I'll go ahead and export this book file
as an EPUB file.
| | 00:53 |
I'll go to Book Panel > Export Book to
EPUB.
| | 00:56 |
(SOUND).
And I'll go to the Contents Section of
| | 01:02 |
this dialog box.
Notice that none of the options within
| | 01:05 |
the table of contents area are selected.
So, when I click Export, InDesign will
| | 01:12 |
still generate the Navigation Guide.
And here it is.
| | 01:16 |
But notice that the entries have been
created, based on the names of my
| | 01:20 |
InDesign documents.
So, if you want more control over the
| | 01:25 |
content and the structure of the
Navigation Guide, you need to set up a
| | 01:28 |
TOC style, which will then be used to
generate the Navigation Guide when you
| | 01:32 |
export the EPUB file.
Let me show how that's done.
| | 01:36 |
I'll go ahead and create a TOC style
within the contents document.
| | 01:43 |
This is the document that contains the
table of contents.
| | 01:46 |
The traditional one that appears in the
beginning of the ebook.
| | 01:49 |
But it doesn't really matter which
document you create to TOC style in
| | 01:53 |
because when you export the EPUB file,
you can specify which document contains
| | 01:57 |
the TOC style.
Now, before you can actually set up a TOC
| | 02:03 |
style, you first need to create and
consistently apply paragraph styles to
| | 02:07 |
all the text that will make up your
navigation guide.
| | 02:13 |
For this book, I applied a style called
Section Title to my Contents Heading, and
| | 02:18 |
all of the section headings.
And I created a style called Chapter
| | 02:23 |
Name, which I've applied to all of my
chapter headings.
| | 02:28 |
So, after you've applied the necessary
paragraph styles, you're then ready to
| | 02:31 |
create the TOC style.
I'll go back to the contents document to
| | 02:37 |
create a TOC style.
Go up to Layout > Table of Contents Styles.
| | 02:44 |
Click the New button to create a new
style.
| | 02:45 |
I'll just call this Navigation Guide.
(SOUND).
| | 02:49 |
And the title, you can ignore this.
Really, the only area that you're
| | 02:54 |
concerned with in this dialog box is the
Include Paragraph Styles area.
| | 03:01 |
So, all you need to do is move the styles
from this box over here to this box on
| | 03:05 |
the left side to determine the content of
your navigation guide.
| | 03:11 |
And the two styles that determine the
content of my navigation guide are
| | 03:15 |
Section Title and Chapter Name.
So, I'll locate the Section Title style
| | 03:20 |
and click Add.
And then, I'll locate the Chapter Name style.
| | 03:25 |
(SOUND).
There it is.
| | 03:26 |
I'll click Add.
Notice that it's slightly indented.
| | 03:30 |
That means that this is a level two
entry.
| | 03:34 |
I'll convert this to a level one entry by
clicking More Options.
| | 03:38 |
And then here in the level box, typing in
the number one.
| | 03:43 |
So, now that these are both level one
entries, that's the way all the entries
| | 03:46 |
will appear in the Navigation Guide.
I also need to make sure and check
| | 03:51 |
Include Book Documents, since this
document that contains the TOC style, is
| | 03:56 |
part of a book file.
And now I'm ready to click OK.
| | 04:01 |
It's really that simple.
So, now when you export this as an EPUB
| | 04:05 |
file, you need to specify which of the
documents in this book file contains the
| | 04:10 |
TOC style by specifying it as the style
source.
| | 04:15 |
So, I'll click to the left side of the
document that specifies it as the style source.
| | 04:21 |
I'll go ahead and save this document, Cmd
or Ctrl+S, and now I'll export my ebook.
| | 04:28 |
From Panel > Export Book to EPUB.
And this time, in the Contents Section, I
| | 04:35 |
want to check Include InDesign TOC
entries.
| | 04:39 |
And then for the TOC style, specify the
TOC style that I just created.
| | 04:45 |
Now, had I not specified the contents
document as the style source in the book
| | 04:49 |
file, the Navigation Guide TOC style
would not have appeared in this menu.
| | 04:54 |
All right, the other thing I want to do
is suppress automatic entries for documents.
| | 05:00 |
This way the document names themselves
don't appear in my Navigation Guide.
| | 05:05 |
And now I am ready to click Export.
And here it is, my Navigation Guide,
| | 05:09 |
using the proper names and each one of
these entries when clicked upon takes me
| | 05:14 |
right to the section of the book.
Now, it's also possible to create a
| | 05:19 |
multilevel Navigation Guide.
Let me show you how that's done.
| | 05:25 |
I'll go back to the Contents Document,
which contains my TOC style.
| | 05:28 |
Go up to Layout > Table of Contents
Styles.
| | 05:32 |
And then, I'll Edit this style.
I'll click Edit.
| | 05:36 |
I'll convert Chapter Name into a level
two entry, and click OK.
| | 05:41 |
I'll save the document, Cmd or Ctrl+S,
and I'll export the EPUB file.
| | 05:51 |
Again, in the Content Section, I just
want to make sure that I've included the
| | 05:55 |
TOC entries, the Navigation Guide, TOC
style is specified, and I'm suppressing
| | 05:59 |
those automatic entries for the document
names.
| | 06:07 |
And here it is, a multilevel navigation
guide.
| | 06:10 |
Each section contains the chapters within
it.
| | 06:14 |
Now, I've been working with an InDesign
book file but, that doesn't mean that you
| | 06:18 |
can generate a navigation guide when you
export a single InDesign document as an
| | 06:21 |
EPUB file.
You just go through the same steps that I
| | 06:25 |
just demonstrated.
So, now you know how to set up an
| | 06:30 |
InDesign TOC style that is then used to
generate a navigation guide in an ebook.
| | 06:38 |
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Inserting metadata| 00:00 |
Metadata is an important part of every
eBook because it describes the book and
| | 00:05 |
it makes it searchable.
There was a time when Metadata was
| | 00:10 |
something that only people working in a
warehouse had to worry about.
| | 00:14 |
But these days, Metadata is absolutely
necessary for consumers because it allows
| | 00:18 |
them to find eBooks through web searches.
And as you can imagine, that makes
| | 00:24 |
Metadata an incredible marketing tool for
publishers.
| | 00:28 |
In this lesson, you will learn how to add
Metadata to an InDesign document so that
| | 00:32 |
it gets exported when you create the EPUB
file.
| | 00:36 |
The EPUB file format actually supports a
number of Metadata entries, such as the
| | 00:41 |
title, the author, and the publisher of a
book.
| | 00:45 |
InDesign can automatically export some of
the important Metadata entries for you
| | 00:49 |
when you export an EPUB file.
So to add Metadata to an InDesign
| | 00:54 |
document, go up to the File menu and
choose File Info.
| | 01:00 |
That opens up the File Information dialog
box, which actually contains a lot of
| | 01:05 |
different Metadata fields.
However, only five of these are actually
| | 01:12 |
exported to an EPUB file, and they're
located within the Description tab.
| | 01:18 |
That's Document Title, Author,
Description, Keywords, and Copyright Notice.
| | 01:24 |
For the Document Title, just enter the
name of your publication.
| | 01:30 |
And for the Author, enter the first and
last name of the author.
| | 01:35 |
If there are more then one author, then
separate them with a semicolon.
| | 01:44 |
For the Description, you'll normally
enter some text that describes your book
| | 01:47 |
and that might be the same text that's
found on the back of the printed version
| | 01:50 |
of the book.
And then, for the Keywords field, you're
| | 01:59 |
going to want to enter several keywords
that describe your publication subject categories.
| | 02:05 |
Now, if you don't already know the
keywords for your book, I suggest that
| | 02:09 |
you select a subject from a controlled
vocabulary, such as the list that the
| | 02:13 |
Book Industry Study Group provides.
The Book Industry Study Group is the book
| | 02:20 |
industry's leading trade association for
research and supply chain standards.
| | 02:27 |
You can find a complete list of subject
headings on their website.
| | 02:32 |
Their website is www.bisg.org, locate
their subject headings I'm looking at
| | 02:35 |
that page now.
So, here are all the major headings.
| | 02:45 |
Let's say that my book is part of
computers so I would click there.
| | 02:50 |
And then here, you would find a list of
many subcategories.
| | 02:55 |
So, I would just select one of these and
copy it, go back to InDesign and paste it
| | 03:01 |
into my Keywords field.
And then, multiple keywords should be
| | 03:07 |
separated with either semicolons or
commas.
| | 03:11 |
And then, for the copyright notice, just
enter the copyright information for your
| | 03:17 |
publication, such as copyright, followed
by the copyright symbol, the date,
| | 03:23 |
something like that.
And once you've filled out all of the
| | 03:28 |
Metadata, click OK, and now watch when
you export the eBook.
| | 03:33 |
You just need to make sure and select
Include Document Metadata to make sure
| | 03:39 |
that those five fields are exported.
Also notice that there are two additional
| | 03:48 |
Metadata fields here in this Export
Options dialog box, Add Publisher Entry
| | 03:52 |
and Unique Identifier.
These two fields are not available in the
| | 03:57 |
File Information dialog box, so you
definitely want to fill these fields out
| | 04:01 |
as well.
This would be the publisher of your book
| | 04:06 |
such as Adobe Press.
And for the Unique Identifier, you can
| | 04:10 |
enter your eBook's ISBN number.
Now, if you don't enter anything here,
| | 04:15 |
InDesign will actually create a unique
identifier for you because every eBook
| | 04:20 |
needs to have one.
So, that text that I just removed was the
| | 04:24 |
Unique Identifier that InDesign would
have automatically created.
| | 04:29 |
But you would want to enter something
like a standard 13-digit ISBN number here.
| | 04:34 |
And then, once you click Export, that
Metadata is exported to the eBook.
| | 04:41 |
Now inside of Adobe Digital Editions, I
can display some of that Metadata by
| | 04:46 |
clicking on the Reading menu and choosing
Item information.
| | 04:52 |
And here, you can see the name of the
eBook, and the author, and the publisher.
| | 04:59 |
Some other eBook readers will actually
display more information about it.
| | 05:04 |
And as you're shopping for eBooks on
different websites, some websites will
| | 05:08 |
display more Metadata information than
others.
| | 05:12 |
Alright.
So, there's one last thing that I'd like
| | 05:15 |
to mention.
That is, if you are exporting an EPUBfile
| | 05:19 |
from an In Design book file, make sure
that the document that contains the
| | 05:23 |
Metadata is specified as the Style
Source.
| | 05:28 |
So, if the Contents Chapter contained the
Metadata, I would need to click to the
| | 05:32 |
left side of the Document Name to specify
it as the style source.
| | 05:38 |
That way, when I export this file as an
EPUB file, the Metadata is exported from
| | 05:43 |
that chapter.
Alright.
| | 05:48 |
So now, you know how to add Metadata to
an InDesign document and export it to an
| | 05:52 |
EPUB file.
| | 05:54 |
| | Collapse this transcript |
|
|
7. Beyond InDesign: Editing an EPUB FileIncluding additional metadata| 00:02 |
When you export an EPUB file from
InDesign, only some of the available
| | 00:05 |
metadata entries are actually filled out.
So you have to edit the EPUB file in
| | 00:11 |
order to add more metadata to it.
In this lesson, I'm going to show you how
| | 00:15 |
to do just that.
InDesign CS5 provides seven metadata
| | 00:19 |
fields that are exported to an EPUB file.
Within the File Informatoin dialog box,
| | 00:27 |
you can fill out the document title, the
author, description, key words and a
| | 00:33 |
copyright notice.
And then InDesign will export this
| | 00:38 |
information to an EPUB file.
And then when you export the EPUB file,
| | 00:44 |
there are two additional fields that can
be filled out as well.
| | 00:52 |
The publisher entry, and the unique
identifier.
| | 00:56 |
Now if you're using InDesign CS4, the
unique identifier field isn't available.
| | 01:01 |
But all the other metadata fields are.
All right, let's open up a completed EPUB
| | 01:06 |
file that I created earlier.
I'm going to open it with Oxygen XML Editor.
| | 01:11 |
I'll switch over to it.
So within Oxygen, I'm going to open the
| | 01:15 |
EPUB file within the Archive Browser
panel.
| | 01:20 |
To do that, I'll click this Open Archive
button, locate the EPUB file and click Open.
| | 01:26 |
So to access the metadata within an EPUB
file, you need to open the content.opf
| | 01:32 |
file, which is located within the OEBPS
folder.
| | 01:38 |
Here it is.
I'll double-click it to open it up.
| | 01:42 |
Now the first time that you open the OPF
file, you're asked to associate it with a
| | 01:46 |
known file type.
This is just an XML file, so I'll keep
| | 01:51 |
XML selected and the select Sssociate
File Type With Editor and click OK.
| | 02:00 |
From now on I won't be asked that
question.
| | 02:02 |
Notice that all the code within this file
is located on a single line.
| | 02:07 |
So it's impossible to read it.
Oxygen provides a wonderful tool for
| | 02:11 |
making this code reader friendly.
It's right up here, and it's called
| | 02:17 |
Format and Indent.
I'll go ahead and click that, and now
| | 02:20 |
this XML code is much easier to read.
So all the metadata for an EPUB file is
| | 02:26 |
contained within this metadata element.
Notice that the metadata that I added to
| | 02:32 |
my InDesign document has been added to
this EPUB file.
| | 02:36 |
Here's the title, the creator, the
subject, the description, and then the
| | 02:41 |
publisher copyright and unique
identifier.
| | 02:45 |
But as you can see, InDesign doesn't fill
out all the available elements.
| | 02:50 |
So you might want to fill out some of
them if they're relevant to your ebook.
| | 02:54 |
In fact, it's always a good idea to add a
date to your EPUB file.
| | 03:00 |
This date element is currently empty.
So I need to add information to it.
| | 03:07 |
To do that, I'm going to remove this
forward slash, and then Oxygen will add
| | 03:10 |
an end tag to the element.
Now all I need to do is fill out the date
| | 03:15 |
for my publication.
And here's how you need to do that.
| | 03:19 |
You start by filling in a required four
digit year.
| | 03:23 |
And the you can add an optional two digit
month, and then if the month is given,
| | 03:29 |
you need to add an optional two digit day
of the month.
| | 03:35 |
And then there's other metadata as well.
The source, relation and coverage; now
| | 03:40 |
these are optional metadata entries.
For the source, you would fill out
| | 03:46 |
information about a prior resource from
which your publication was derived.
| | 03:51 |
And for the relation element, you need to
enter a reference to a related resource.
| | 03:58 |
For coverage, you can add information
about the extent or scope of your
| | 04:02 |
publication's content.
Now, in addition to these meta data
| | 04:07 |
fields, there are actually three more
fields that can be added to an EPUB file.
| | 04:13 |
They are contributor, type, and format.
So, if I wanted to enter a contributor
| | 04:18 |
element, I would just need to make sure
and enter it somewhere within this
| | 04:22 |
outermost metadata element.
I can add it here.
| | 04:27 |
So I would need to type in a less than
symbol followed by DC, which stands for
| | 04:31 |
Doublin Core.
And then I would just type in a colon
| | 04:36 |
followed by a contributor.
And then a greater than symbol.
| | 04:41 |
So for the contributor element, you need
to add the name of a person, or even an
| | 04:45 |
organization, who contributed to your
publication.
| | 04:49 |
So, if Joe Smith helped me out with this
publication, I would just type in his
| | 04:53 |
name right here.
So if you wanted to add a type element to
| | 04:57 |
this, you would do the same thing.
Just add a new line, type in DC, followed
| | 05:02 |
by the word type.
So here you would enter the genre of your publication.
| | 05:10 |
And the last metadata element that can be
added to an EPUB file, is the format element.
| | 05:16 |
Here you would add the media type, or the
dimension of your publication.
| | 05:22 |
So if you want more detailed information
about these entries, and how to properly
| | 05:26 |
conform to the Dublin Core Metadata
standard I reccomend checking out their website.
| | 05:34 |
I'll switch over to that.
So here's their website, which you can
| | 05:40 |
find by going to dublincore.org.
And I have this particular document open,
| | 05:46 |
which is the Doublin Core Metadata
Element Set.
| | 05:51 |
And this really gives you a complete
description of all those metadata
| | 05:55 |
elements, and how to use them properly.
Alright, so now you know how to edit an
| | 06:02 |
EPUB file, in order to add additional
metadata to it.
| | 06:08 |
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Customizing the navigation guide| 00:02 |
In this lesson, you'll learn how to
customize the navigation guide in a EPUB file.
| | 00:06 |
After exporting an EPUB file from
InDesign, it's sometimes necessary to
| | 00:10 |
customize the names that appear in the
navigation guide.
| | 00:15 |
In Adobe Digital Additions, the
navigation guide is displayed in the
| | 00:19 |
panel over here at the left side of the
window.
| | 00:23 |
Notice that the name of this entry is
quite long.
| | 00:27 |
Since the heading paragraph style is
applied to this text in the InDesign
| | 00:30 |
document, this is the text that shows up
in the navigation guide.
| | 00:36 |
Now, I think that this entry should
actually say about the author, which
| | 00:39 |
would more clearly label the content of
this section and it would make more sense
| | 00:43 |
to the reader as well.
This next section contains a list of
| | 00:48 |
other stories by the same Author.
So, to more clearly explain what this
| | 00:52 |
section is, I think the entry should say,
list of stories, instead.
| | 00:58 |
So, to make these changes to the
navigation guide, I need to edit the EPub file.
| | 01:04 |
I'll go ahead and open it up with Oxygen
XML Editor.
| | 01:08 |
(SOUND).
At the top of the archive browser panel,
| | 01:10 |
I'll click the Open Archive button.
I'll locate that EPUB file and open it up.
| | 01:16 |
Within the OEBPS folder, I need to locate
the TOC.ncx file.
| | 01:24 |
I'll go ahead and double-click it to open
it.
| | 01:28 |
This is an XML file and it serves as the
navigation guide in an ebook reader.
| | 01:34 |
Right now it's impossible to read because
all the code is on one line.
| | 01:39 |
So, to make this XML more reader
friendly, I'm going to click this button
| | 01:44 |
up here, Format and Indent.
And Oxygen has made this XML much easier
| | 01:51 |
to read.
All the content for the navigation guide
| | 01:55 |
is defined within this NavMap element.
The bottom of this element is located
| | 02:01 |
down at the bottom of this file.
Each entry in the navigation guide is
| | 02:07 |
defined by a NavPoint.
Notice there are multiple NavPoints
| | 02:12 |
within the NavMap element.
Each NavPoint contains a NavLabel.
| | 02:18 |
And within each NavLabel is a text
element, which contains the actual text
| | 02:23 |
that shows up in the navigation guide.
So, to change the text for the entry, all
| | 02:29 |
I have to do is select it, and then
replace it with the actual text that I
| | 02:33 |
want to see.
So, in this case, I'd like this to say
| | 02:38 |
about the author.
And this next entry, this should say list
| | 02:44 |
of stories.
I'll go ahead and save the file, Cmd or Ctrl+S.
| | 02:51 |
And lets view the results.
I'll hide Oxygen and double-click the
| | 02:55 |
EPUB file to reopen it.
And as you can see, both of those entries
| | 02:59 |
have been modified.
This one says, About the Author.
| | 03:03 |
And this one now says, List of Stories.
So, now you know how to customize the
| | 03:08 |
Navigation Guide in an EPUB file.
It's really quite simple.
| | 03:12 |
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Adding drop caps| 00:02 |
In this lesson, I'm going to show you how
to create a drop cap in an eBook.
| | 00:06 |
Unfortunately, when you export an EPUB
file from InDesign, any drop cap
| | 00:10 |
formatting that you've applied is
completely ignored.
| | 00:14 |
So to create a drop cap, you have to edit
the EPUB file after exporting it from InDesign.
| | 00:20 |
Let me show you how that's done.
I'll switch over to the InDesign document
| | 00:24 |
that was used to create this EPUB file.
And to expedite the process of creating
| | 00:29 |
the drop cap, I'm going to first apply a
character style to the drop cap character.
| | 00:35 |
I'll go ahead and select it, and apply
the drop cap character style.
| | 00:38 |
And now I can export the EPUB file.
From the File menu, I'll choose Export
| | 00:44 |
For, and then EPUB.
I'll send this file to the desktop, and
| | 00:49 |
I'd like to view this eBook, after
exporting it, so I'll select this option,
| | 00:54 |
and then in the Contents section, I want
to deselect include embeddable fonts, and
| | 00:59 |
preserve local overrides.
And now I'll click Export.
| | 01:06 |
And as you can see, the drop cap
formatting was completely ignored in this
| | 01:10 |
EPUB file.
So, I need to edit this file, in order to
| | 01:14 |
create the drop cap.
To do that, I'm going to use Oxygen XML editor.
| | 01:20 |
At the top of the archive browser panel,
I'll click the Open Archive button,
| | 01:25 |
select the EPUP file that I want to open
up and open it.
| | 01:31 |
Now within the OEBPS folder, I'm going to
locate that XHTML file that was generated.
| | 01:37 |
I'll open it up, because I'd like you to
notice that by applying that character
| | 01:42 |
style, you've caused InDesign to create
this span element, that surrounds the
| | 01:47 |
drop cap character.
And notice that the class attribute for
| | 01:53 |
this span element is drop cap, which is
the name of the character style that I applied.
| | 02:00 |
So to format the drop cap I need to edit
the CSS rule for drop cap.
| | 02:05 |
I'll go ahead and Open up the CSS file.
The CSS rules for all the span elements
| | 02:10 |
are always located at the very bottom of
the document.
| | 02:16 |
And here is the rule for drop cap.
It's empty right now.
| | 02:20 |
So I need to add formatting to this.
I'll start by increasing the fonts size,
| | 02:26 |
so I'll type in font hyphen size,
followed by a colon, and then I'd like
| | 02:31 |
this to be four times larger than the
body text size, which is 1em.
| | 02:38 |
So I'll just type in 4em, followed by a
semicolon.
| | 02:42 |
Now I'll save this document, Cmd or
Ctrl+S.
| | 02:46 |
Now, if you ever are asked this question
within the Oxygen XML editor, you don't
| | 02:51 |
want to back anything up, so select No
Backup and then, Never Ask Me Again.
| | 02:58 |
I'll click OK, that saves the file.
Let's open that EPUB file back up.
| | 03:04 |
I go ahead and hide Oxygen and I'll hide
InDesign as well.
| | 03:11 |
Now I will double-click the EPUB file to
reopen it, and the new changes that I
| | 03:16 |
just made are loaded.
And as you can see the drop cap character
| | 03:20 |
is now four times larger than the body
text size.
| | 03:24 |
But now I'd like to make sure that the
text flows around the drop cap character.
| | 03:30 |
And I need to bring that character down
into the text.
| | 03:34 |
So I'll go back to Oxygen, and add
another property to this CSS rule, and
| | 03:39 |
that property would be float.
The float property causes the drop cap
| | 03:46 |
letter to float and allows the other text
to flow around it.
| | 03:51 |
I'd like it to float to the left, so I'll
select left from this menu and press Return.
| | 03:57 |
And I'll enter a semicolon, and save the
file Cmd or Ctrl+S.
| | 04:03 |
I'll reopen the EPUB file to see the
results.
| | 04:08 |
And now you can see its floating to the
left and text is now flowing around the character.
| | 04:13 |
But now I need to bring the letter down
more into the text.
| | 04:17 |
So to do that I am going to add another
property which is Line-Height.
| | 04:25 |
Line hyphen Height, followed by a colon,
and then the value which needs to be a
| | 04:32 |
value of 1em or smaller.
I'll save that, hide Oxygen and reopen
| | 04:39 |
EPUB file, and as you can see that brings
Drop Cap Character down into the text.
| | 04:47 |
But now we have another problem.
We have too much space below the Drop Cap Character.
| | 04:52 |
So to remove that, I'll add yet another
property to our CSS rule.
| | 04:57 |
And that would be margin bottom.
This needs to be a negative value.
| | 05:02 |
I'm going to type in negative 0.3em.
Now you'll probably go back and forth
| | 05:12 |
until you get to the value right, because
you need to adjust it according to the
| | 05:15 |
size of the drop cap character that you
created.
| | 05:20 |
All right let us view the results.
And now you can see that works very well
| | 05:27 |
so next I could open up a little bit more
space of the drop cap character, and to
| | 05:32 |
do that I'll add another property and
that would be width.
| | 05:40 |
This needs to be smaller than a value of
1.
| | 05:46 |
I'll just start with 0.8 em, and that
decreases the width of the character,
| | 05:51 |
which allows a little bit more space to
appear to the right side of it.
| | 05:59 |
And that's all there is to it.
As you can see, the combination of these
| | 06:04 |
CSS properties creates a drop cap.
You can even add more properties if you
| | 06:10 |
like, such as a font weighted bold, if
you want to make your drop cap character
| | 06:14 |
appear bold.
So now you know how to create a drop cap
| | 06:18 |
character in an EPUB file.
Simply apply a character style to the
| | 06:22 |
drop cap character in InDesign.
And then, after exporting the EPUB file,
| | 06:28 |
open it up into your favorite editor and
edit the CSS.
| | 06:34 |
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Creating paragraph rules| 00:02 |
In this lesson, I'm going to demonstrate
how to create paragraph rules, both above
| | 00:06 |
and below text in an eBook.
When you export an ePub file from
| | 00:11 |
InDesign, any paragraph rules that you
applied are ignored.
| | 00:16 |
So to create them, you have to edit the
ePub file after exporting it from InDesign.
| | 00:21 |
I'll switch over in In Design and work
you through the process.
| | 00:25 |
I'd like you to notice that a paragraph
style has been applied to this text.
| | 00:29 |
The style defines both a paragraph rule
above and a rule below.
| | 00:35 |
Now when I export this file as an ePub
file, unfortunately these paragraph rules
| | 00:40 |
will disappear.
I'll go ahead and export the Epub file.
| | 00:48 |
I'll send it to the Desktop and I'd like
to view this Ebook after exporting so
| | 00:52 |
I'll click this option here and in the
contents section I'll deselect, Include
| | 00:58 |
Embeddable Fonts.
I definetly don't want to include them in
| | 01:03 |
this Epub file.
And I don't want to preserve the local
| | 01:07 |
overrides either, and I'll click export.
Here's my e pub file.
| | 01:13 |
So to create the paragraph rules I need
to edit the CSS file within the e pub file.
| | 01:18 |
I'll go ahead, and open it up with the
Oxygen XML editor.
| | 01:23 |
At the top of the archive browser panel,
I'll click the Open Archive button, and
| | 01:27 |
open up the e-pub file.
And within the OEBPS folder, I'll locate
| | 01:33 |
the XHTML file that was generated and go
ahead and open it up.
| | 01:39 |
Because I'd like you to notice that,
since I applied that paragraph style
| | 01:43 |
called body text to the paragraph, it has
become the class attribute for this
| | 01:47 |
paragraph element.
So to create the paragraph rules I need
| | 01:53 |
to edit the CSS rule called body text.
I'll go ahead and Open up the CSS file.
| | 02:00 |
So to create the paragraph rule above and
below this text I'll start by adding a
| | 02:05 |
border around the text.
So I'll just insert a new property, and
| | 02:10 |
that will be border color.
And I'll just make it black, followed by
| | 02:17 |
a semicolon, and press return.
Now, a border color in itself won't do
| | 02:22 |
anything, so I also need to add another
property, border-style.
| | 02:29 |
And I'll make this solid, followed by a
semicolon, and a return.
| | 02:35 |
So I'll go ahead and save this, Cmd or
Ctrl+S.
| | 02:39 |
I'll hide Oxygen.
Let's view the results.
| | 02:44 |
I'll also hide InDesign, and I'll double
click the epub file to reopen it and
| | 02:50 |
refresh the view.
As you can see I've added a border all
| | 02:55 |
the way around this text.
So, next I want to refine this border.
| | 03:01 |
I want to remove the border from both the
left and right edges, and then change the
| | 03:05 |
thickness of the border on the top and
bottom.
| | 03:09 |
I'll go back to oxygen, and to do that I
need to add several more properties.
| | 03:16 |
So I need to specify specific border top
width, border bottom width, a left width,
| | 03:22 |
and border right width.
I'll go ahead and type those properties in.
| | 03:29 |
For the border top width, I want this to
be one pixel.
| | 03:35 |
So px for pixel.
For the border bottom width this should
| | 03:40 |
also be one pixel.
And then for the border left.
| | 03:48 |
This should be zero pixels.
And the same goes for the border right.
| | 03:55 |
So I'm turning those off.
I'll save the file.
| | 04:00 |
It looks like I have a misspelling, which
is what this red underline means.
| | 04:04 |
Now this is what I really like Oxygen
for.
| | 04:07 |
It'll correct my mistakes for me.
So now that's correctly spelled the red
| | 04:12 |
underline disappears I'll Save the file.
I'll hide oxygen and reopen the Epub file
| | 04:23 |
to view the results and there you go.
The paragraph rule is built upINAUDIBLE
| | 04:30 |
lower looking much better but now their
too close to the text so to fix that I
| | 04:34 |
can add a padding property to this.
I just type padding and I will make that
| | 04:42 |
umm, about three corners of an m unit.
All right.
| | 04:48 |
Let's check that out.
I'll reopen the EPUB file, and that's
| | 04:52 |
looking much better.
So as you can see, by combining different
| | 04:56 |
CSS properties I can create a paragraph
rule both above and below this text.
| | 05:03 |
What's also great about this technique is
that the rules will automatically adapt.
| | 05:08 |
To different screen sizes.
Now of course you can get a little bit
| | 05:13 |
more creative if you like.
You can change the color of the text.
| | 05:17 |
So if I want the border color to be red,
and save that.
| | 05:23 |
I can change the color, I can change the
thickness.
| | 05:26 |
So if one pixel isn't enough, I can add
two pixels on the top and keep one pixel
| | 05:30 |
on the bottom.
It's just a matter of fine tuning the
| | 05:36 |
values for each property in your CSS
rule.
| | 05:40 |
So now you know how to create paragraph
rules, both above and below text in an
| | 05:44 |
ePUB file.
You start out by applying a paragraph
| | 05:48 |
style to the text, that has a rule above
or below it, and then edit the ePUB file
| | 05:51 |
after exporting it from InDesign.
And then by using a combination of the
| | 05:57 |
various CSS properties I just
demonstrated, you can format paragraph
| | 06:01 |
rules for any layout.
| | 06:04 |
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Creating boxed text| 00:02 |
In this lesson, I'm going to show you how
to create a Box Effect around text in an
| | 00:06 |
EPUB file.
This effect is useful for making certain
| | 00:09 |
text stand apart from other text in a
document.
| | 00:13 |
In this case, I've created a box around
the Tip Element.
| | 00:17 |
I've also centered it on the page and
I've added space above and below it.
| | 00:21 |
Alright, I'll switch over to InDesign to
show you how it's done.
| | 00:26 |
To expedite the process of creating the
box around the Tip Element, I placed both
| | 00:30 |
the heading and the text within a
separate Text Frame.
| | 00:35 |
I then anchored this text frame within
the main body of text in order to control
| | 00:40 |
its position within the EPUB file.
If I switch over to Normal View mode, you
| | 00:46 |
can see that this text frame has been
placed within its own paragraph return.
| | 00:52 |
Now, the actual formatting that I've
applied to this tip box will be ignored
| | 00:56 |
when I export the EPUB file but at least
the structure will be preserved.
| | 01:02 |
Alright, so the last step and most
important step in the process is to apply
| | 01:07 |
an Object Style to this Text Frame.
I've already applied an Object Style to
| | 01:13 |
it and it's called Tip.
By applying an Object Style, I'm labeling
| | 01:18 |
this component so that it's easier to
edit it in the EPUB file.
| | 01:22 |
Alright.
I'll go ahead and export the EPUB file now.
| | 01:26 |
From the File menu, I'll choose Export
For and then EPUB.
| | 01:31 |
I'll save it to the Desktop and I'll
click Export.
| | 01:37 |
So, as you can see, all the formatting
has been lost and the text runs right
| | 01:41 |
along with the rest of the body text in
the eBook.
| | 01:46 |
So, to create the box around this text
and add the space above, below it, and on
| | 01:51 |
the left and right sides, I need to edit
the CSS file within the EPUB file.
| | 01:58 |
I'll go ahead and open this EPUB file up
with Oxygen XML editor.
| | 02:03 |
At the top of the Archive Browser panel,
I'll click the Open Archive button, and
| | 02:08 |
then open up the EPUB file.
And then I'm going to open up the XHTML
| | 02:13 |
file, which is located within the OEBPS
folder.
| | 02:18 |
This was generated from the InDesign
document.
| | 02:21 |
I'd like you to notice that since I
placed the tip text within a Text Frame,
| | 02:27 |
the Text Frame has been converted to a
DIV element.
| | 02:33 |
Notice that this selected DIV tag
contains two paragraphs.
| | 02:38 |
One for the Tip Heading, and one for the
Tip Text.
| | 02:43 |
And by applying an object style to that
Text Frame, which was Tip, that has
| | 02:47 |
become the class attribute for the DIV
tag.
| | 02:52 |
So, all that work that I did in InDesign
has set me up to be more productive when
| | 02:56 |
editing the EPUB file.
All I have to do now is edit the CSS rule
| | 03:01 |
for the Tip.
So, I'll go ahead and open up the CSS file.
| | 03:06 |
Notice that all the CSS rules for DIV
elements are located at the very top of
| | 03:11 |
the CSS file.
The Tip rule is currently empty so I just
| | 03:15 |
need to define the formatting for it.
The first property that I'll insert is
| | 03:20 |
Border Color.
And I'll just make that black followed by
| | 03:25 |
a semicolon and I'll press Return.
Now by itself, Border Color won't
| | 03:31 |
actually do anything so I need to add a
Border Style property to this as well.
| | 03:38 |
And I'll make this solid and press
Return.
| | 03:41 |
I'll go ahead and save this, Cmd or Ctrl
+ S and now, let's take a look at the results.
| | 03:47 |
I'll hide Oxygen and InDesign is well and
now all I need to do is double-click the
| | 03:53 |
EPUB file to reopen it and refresh the
results.
| | 04:00 |
As you can see ,I've added a border
around the Tip.
| | 04:03 |
So next, I just need to change the width
of this border, and then add the space
| | 04:08 |
above, below and to both sides of it.
So, I'll go ahead and go back to Oxygen,
| | 04:14 |
and I'll add a few more properties to
this rule.
| | 04:17 |
I'll make the Border Width, one pixel.
So, one and then px for pixel.
| | 04:26 |
I'd also like to add that margin to the
top and bottom.
| | 04:30 |
So, margin top should be 1M, margin
bottom, margin bottom is 1M.
| | 04:36 |
And then, for the right and left margins,
those should be 3M, so that there's more
| | 04:43 |
space on the left and right edges than
there is on the top and bottom.
| | 04:51 |
So, margin right is 3M, and margin eft is
also 3M.
| | 05:01 |
I'll go ahead and save this.
And let's take a look at the results.
| | 05:06 |
I'll reopen the EPUB file, and as you can
see, I've added space around the Tip Frame.
| | 05:11 |
And the border is now thinner, but I
still need to add space within the frame,
| | 05:16 |
so that the text doesn't touch the edges
of it.
| | 05:20 |
To do that, I just need to add one more
property.
| | 05:24 |
And that's Padding.
Padding will add space around the text
| | 05:29 |
within the frame.
And I'll make that 0.75 EM which is three
| | 05:35 |
quarters of an M unit.
Let's take a look at the results.
| | 05:41 |
And there it is, my Tip Element.
I'll go ahead and decrease the size of
| | 05:45 |
the text to fit more text within the
page.
| | 05:49 |
And I'd also like to point out, that this
box, is expandable.
| | 05:54 |
So, depending on which eBook reader
you're viewing this eBook on, this box
| | 05:58 |
will expand automatically to fit the
width of the screen size for that viewing device.
| | 06:05 |
So now you know how to create boxed text
in an EPUB file.
| | 06:09 |
You start by putting all the text within
a Text Frame, then anchor that Text Frame
| | 06:13 |
within the main body text.
Most importantly, apply an Object Style
| | 06:19 |
to that Text Frame.
Then, after exporting the EPUB file,
| | 06:23 |
simply edit the CSS rule for the Box
Element using the combination of
| | 06:26 |
different CSS properties that I just
demonstrated.
| | 06:31 |
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Formatting tables| 00:02 |
Tables are great for systematically
displaying all types of information and
| | 00:06 |
the ePub file format has good support for
them.
| | 00:10 |
But when you've exported an ePub file
from InDesign any table formatting that
| | 00:14 |
you've applied to your tables is lost.
Fortunately the structure of the tables
| | 00:20 |
is preserved.
So, to format a table in an ePub file,
| | 00:23 |
you just have to edit the CSS file within
it.
| | 00:27 |
In this lesson I'm going to demonstrate
how I created this table.
| | 00:31 |
I'll switch over to InDesign and show you
how it's done.
| | 00:34 |
Now to expedite the process of formatting
this table, I've already applied
| | 00:38 |
paragraph styles to all the text within
the table.
| | 00:42 |
I applied the paragraph style called
Table Title to this text within this
| | 00:46 |
first row.
And then to all the text within the
| | 00:50 |
second row, I applied the paragraph style
called Table Header.
| | 00:54 |
I applied the paragraph style called
Table Body to all of the text in these
| | 00:58 |
cells, and then I applied Table Body Left
to all the text in the left-most column.
| | 01:06 |
I applied Table Body Right to all the
text in the right-most column.
| | 01:11 |
It's also important to apply table styles
and cell styles to the table.
| | 01:16 |
I have already applied table style called
Standard Table to this entire table and I
| | 01:21 |
have applied a few self styles as well.
So, I applied the title self style to
| | 01:28 |
this first header row.
I applied header self style to the second
| | 01:33 |
header row and then I applied body cells
to the rest of the cells in the table.
| | 01:40 |
Notice that every other row, in this
table has a shaded color applied to it.
| | 01:47 |
This formatting is actually applied at
the table level, instead of to the
| | 01:50 |
individual cells within the table.
So, if I go back to the table style and
| | 01:55 |
double click it, here within the fills
category, you can see that I've applied
| | 01:59 |
an alternating pattern, to every other
row.
| | 02:04 |
But in order to easily add this same
color, to these rows within the ePub
| | 02:09 |
file, I need to apply a specific cell
style to them.
| | 02:14 |
So, I'll go ahead and duplicate this cell
style.
| | 02:18 |
I'll just drag this style to the Create
New icon at the bottom of the Cell Styles
| | 02:22 |
panel, and release the Mouse button.
That creates a duplicate.
| | 02:29 |
Now I'll just rename it.
I'll call this Body Cells Shading, which
| | 02:34 |
means that I should also rename this
other style, so I'll call this Body Cells Normal.
| | 02:44 |
All right.
So, now I need to apply the Body Cells
| | 02:47 |
Shading cell style to all of these rows.
Since I've duplicated the style, none of
| | 02:55 |
the formatting in my table actually
changes.
| | 02:59 |
I'm simply tagging these rows.
So, all this work that I've done within
| | 03:03 |
InDesign, has set me up to more easily
format the table in the ePub file.
| | 03:09 |
So, let's go ahead and do that.
I'll export the ePub file from the File
| | 03:14 |
menu, I'll choose Export for and then
ePub.
| | 03:19 |
I like to view the eBook after exporting
it.
| | 03:21 |
And within the Contents category, I want
to deselect Include Embeddable Fonts and
| | 03:26 |
Preserve Local Overrides.
I'll go ahead and click Export, so here's
| | 03:32 |
the table.
None of the table formatting has been
| | 03:36 |
preserved, but the structure of the table
has been preserved, and so has the text formatting.
| | 03:42 |
You can see that the table title is still
white which is why you don't see it, and
| | 03:46 |
you can see that the text is still
correctly aligned.
| | 03:51 |
Over here in the right most column, the
text is right aligned and in the left
| | 03:54 |
most column its still center aligned.
So, the next step is to open up this ePub
| | 04:00 |
file and format the table.
I'll go ahead and open up this ePub file
| | 04:04 |
into Oxygen.
At the top of the Archive Browser panel
| | 04:08 |
I'll click the Open Archive button.
Locate the ePub file, and open it up.
| | 04:15 |
And then, within the OEBPS folder, I'm
going to locate that XHTML file that was
| | 04:20 |
generated, and open it up.
So, that table that I exported from
| | 04:26 |
InDesign, is now being structured using
XHTML markup.
| | 04:31 |
All the information in the table is being
contained within this poutermost table element.
| | 04:38 |
And then within this element, notice that
there's a T-header element.
| | 04:42 |
This is my table header.
My table header contains two rows.
| | 04:47 |
So, here's the first row, that's what TR
stands for.
| | 04:50 |
And here's the second row.
Each row contains cells.
| | 04:55 |
So, that's what a TD tag is.
It defines a standard cell.
| | 04:59 |
And then, within each TD element is a P
element, which contains the actual text
| | 05:04 |
in the cell.
And then down here a little ways is the T
| | 05:10 |
body, which is the main body of the
table.
| | 05:15 |
Notice that the table element has a class
attribute of standard table.
| | 05:21 |
This was generated, based on the name of
the style that I applied, to the the
| | 05:24 |
Table and InDesign.
And notice that each TED element has a
| | 05:28 |
class attribute as well.
These were generated based on the cell
| | 05:36 |
style names that I applied to those
cells.
| | 05:40 |
And each P element has a class attribute
as well.
| | 05:44 |
And these were generated based on the
names of the paragraph styles that I
| | 05:47 |
applied to the text.
So, since the structure of this table has
| | 05:51 |
already been created and the class
attributes are already correctly applied
| | 05:56 |
the only thing that I actually need to do
is open up the CSS file.
| | 06:01 |
And edit the CSS rules in order to format
the table.
| | 06:05 |
I'll go ahead and close this file and
open up the CSS file.
| | 06:10 |
So, all the CSS rules that were created
for the table and cells, are located at
| | 06:14 |
the bottom of this file.
Here's the rule for the table itself,
| | 06:19 |
Standard Table and here are the four
rules for the various cells within the table.
| | 06:27 |
These are empty right now, so I just need
to define their formatting by adding
| | 06:30 |
properties to them.
I'll enter a new line, and the first
| | 06:34 |
thing that I'd like to define is a
background color for my first header row.
| | 06:39 |
So, I'll type in background followed by a
colon and then color.
| | 06:44 |
Now I could choose from one of the colors
in this list of predefined colors, but I
| | 06:49 |
already took note of a hex value that I'd
like to use instead.
| | 06:56 |
So, I'm going to type in the pound
symbol, followed by a capital letter BA.
| | 07:02 |
1E2A, and now I'll press Enter or Return.
I'll go ahead and save this.
| | 07:04 |
Let's take a look at the results so far.
I'll hide Oxygen, and I'll hide InDesign
| | 07:06 |
as well, and now I'll just double click
this ePub file to reopen it.
| | 07:23 |
And as you can see, the background color
now appears behind the text in this first
| | 07:27 |
header row, but the text is touching the
edges of the cell.
| | 07:32 |
So, to fix that, I need to add some
padding to this CSS rule.
| | 07:37 |
I'll go ahead and type in padding, and
I'll make that about five pixels, PX for
| | 07:43 |
pixels, I'll save that.
Let's view the results that's looking
| | 07:51 |
much better.
So, now I'll define the border around the
| | 07:55 |
next header row.
I'll go ahead and go back to Oxygen.
| | 08:02 |
I'll start by defining the border color.
And again that's a hex value, which is 6F4F2C.
| | 08:15 |
In case you're wondering how I got those
hex values, Mac OS 10 ships with a
| | 08:18 |
wonderful utility called the digital
color meter, which you can actually find
| | 08:22 |
within the utilities folder.
And I used the digital color meter to
| | 08:28 |
discover what those colors were.
Now if you don't have that tool, you can
| | 08:32 |
use Photoshop to discover what the hex
value of color is.
| | 08:37 |
Okay, so now that I have defined the
color, I'm going to define the border
| | 08:41 |
style which should be solid.
And then the border width, which should
| | 08:48 |
be one pixel and I'll just go ahead and
add the same padding value that I added
| | 08:53 |
to the first header row.
Alright, I've saved the file, let's
| | 09:01 |
review the results.
So, as you can see, a border has been
| | 09:09 |
applied to each cell.
And notice that there's spacing between
| | 09:14 |
the cells.
Now I need to turn that off.
| | 09:18 |
So, to do that, I'm going to go back to
Oxygen, reopen that XHTML file, locate
| | 09:23 |
the table element, and then I need to add
another attribute to this element.
| | 09:30 |
And that attribute is cell spacing, that
should have a value of 0, to turn off the
| | 09:37 |
cell spacing.
I'll save that, and if I hide Oxygen, and
| | 09:44 |
double click the ePub file.
You can see that I've removed the spacing
| | 09:49 |
between those cells.
And it's looking much better now.
| | 09:52 |
So, now all that's left is the formatting
for the normal body cells and, the body
| | 09:56 |
cells that have shading.
I'll go ahead and format the normal table
| | 10:01 |
cells first.
I will just copy all of these properties
| | 10:06 |
from the table header I have defined.
And paste them, into the body cells
| | 10:14 |
normal rule because I know I want those
too look the same.
| | 10:24 |
Reopen the file, and as you can see only
those rows to which the body cells normal
| | 10:30 |
style was applied to have been formatted.
So, I need to add that same formatting to
| | 10:37 |
the body cells shading rule.
I'll just paste those properties in, save
| | 10:46 |
the file and the table is almost
complete.
| | 10:52 |
Next I need to add shading to every other
row.
| | 10:56 |
So, I'll go back to Oxygen, and that's
quite easily done.
| | 11:01 |
By adding a new property to the body
cells shading rule, and that would be a
| | 11:05 |
background property.
And the color that I'd like to apply to
| | 11:13 |
those rows is E7E0D9.
So, that should finish my table.
| | 11:21 |
Alright that's really looking good,
there's only one thing that I'm noticing
| | 11:25 |
that I'm not liking too much.
And that's that this outer most stroke or
| | 11:31 |
boarder is thinner that the inner
boarders.
| | 11:35 |
And that's because the borders within the
table are teaming up to create a slightly
| | 11:39 |
thicker border.
So, to work around this, I'm going to add
| | 11:43 |
a border around the entire table itself.
So, to do that, I'm going to add the
| | 11:50 |
border properties to the
table.standardtable CSS rule.
| | 11:56 |
For the border color, I'm going to use
the same color that was applied to the
| | 12:00 |
background of the title.
So, I'll just copy this value.
| | 12:08 |
Paste that in, the border style should be
solid.
| | 12:15 |
And the border width should be one pixel.
It looks like I have a misspelling here,
| | 12:22 |
I'll go ahead and delete that extra D.
And now that this CSS is valid, I can
| | 12:27 |
save the file, and let's view the
results.
| | 12:32 |
And now there's a one pixel border
surrounding the entire table And that
| | 12:36 |
completes my table.
The great thing about tables is that they
| | 12:40 |
automatically adjust when you change the
size of the text.
| | 12:44 |
So, I'll decrease the size of the text,
and notice that the table decreases as well.
| | 12:53 |
And when I increase the text, the same
thing happens.
| | 12:56 |
Once the width of the table expands to
fit the entire available screen, it'll
| | 13:00 |
start to wrap around within the screen
and the same thing will happen when I
| | 13:05 |
re-size the window.
So, this will give you and idea of how
| | 13:10 |
this table will be presented when viewed
on a smaller screen.
| | 13:14 |
Notice that some of the rows on this
table are now hidden.
| | 13:18 |
They now appear on the next page.
So, the only difficulty with tables, is
| | 13:22 |
that some tables contain a lot of
information, and they try to fit it all
| | 13:26 |
into a small amount of space.
Most eBook readers have fairly small
| | 13:31 |
screen sizes.
Even the iPad, which is one of the larger
| | 13:35 |
eBook reading devices available, has
problems displaying some tables.
| | 13:39 |
Let me show this same table as viewed
with the iBooks app on the iPad.
| | 13:45 |
So, as you can see, when the iPad is
vertically oriented, this table looks great.
| | 13:51 |
but when I flip the iPad horizontally and
look at it in a two page spread, the
| | 13:56 |
table has to re-flow in order to fit onto
the page.
| | 14:01 |
And it really doesn't look that great.
Notice that the word rank has been
| | 14:05 |
divided on to two lines and so has the
word headquarters.
| | 14:09 |
And part of the text is being cut off at
the top of this table, over here on the
| | 14:13 |
right facing page.
So, to solve this problem I can either
| | 14:18 |
use smaller text within the table or I
could convert the table to an image instead.
| | 14:25 |
The only drawback to using images instead
of actual tables, is that the text within
| | 14:29 |
the table will no longer be searchable.
Alright so now you know how to format
| | 14:35 |
tables in an ePub file.
You start by applying paragraph styles
| | 14:39 |
and any necessary character styles to the
text within the table.
| | 14:44 |
Then you apply a Table Style to the table
and any necessary Cell Styles to the
| | 14:48 |
cells within the table.
All of this work sets you up to more
| | 14:54 |
easily format the table with CSS Styles,
when you edit the ePub file.
| | 14:59 |
Just keep in mind that although table
formatting is supported on many eBook readers.
| | 15:05 |
It's not supported on all of them.
It's definitely supported on the iPad
| | 15:10 |
using the iBooks app.
And obviously, Adobe Digital Additions
| | 15:14 |
supports table formatting, which means
that Adobe supported eBook readers such
| | 15:18 |
as the Sony Reader do as well.
| | 15:21 |
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Creating scalable images| 00:01 |
Some eBook readers, such as the Apple
iPad, automatically scale large images to
| | 00:06 |
fit to the screen.
But other eBook readers such as the Sony
| | 00:10 |
Reader, do not automatically scale
images.
| | 00:14 |
So if you view an image that's too large
to fit on the screen of a Sony Reader,
| | 00:18 |
parts of the image will be cropped out.
In this lesson, I'm going to show you how
| | 00:24 |
to ensure that your images always scale
to fit any screen size that they are
| | 00:27 |
viewed on.
Notice that a large portion of this image
| | 00:32 |
is being cropped out by the window and if
I make this window even smaller, even
| | 00:36 |
more of the image is hidden.
This is exactly how this image would
| | 00:41 |
appear when viewed on a small eBook
reader that doesn't automatically scale images.
| | 00:46 |
Unfortunately, there's nothing you can do
within InDesign to fix this.
| | 00:51 |
So, you have to edit the EPUB file after
exporting it from InDesign.
| | 00:56 |
The good news is that it is quite easy to
fix the problem.
| | 01:00 |
So, let me show you how that's done.
I'll go ahead and open this EPUB file
| | 01:04 |
into Oxygen XML Editor.
At the top of the Archive Browser panel,
| | 01:09 |
I'll click the Open Archive button.
I'll locate this EPUB file and open it up.
| | 01:16 |
And then, within the OEBPS folder, I'm
going to locate that XHTML file that was
| | 01:21 |
generated by InDesign, and then
double-click it to open it.
| | 01:27 |
Next, I need to locate the image element
that was generated for the image.
| | 01:31 |
And that's this element here.
Notice this element contains two
| | 01:36 |
attributes, a Source Attribute and an Alt
Attribute.
| | 01:41 |
The Source Attribute contains a file path
which tells the eBook reader where to
| | 01:45 |
find the actual image file, which is
located in this Images folder here.
| | 01:51 |
So in order to ensure that the height of
this image always fits the height of the
| | 01:55 |
screen that it's viewed on, I'm going to
add one more attribute to the image element.
| | 02:01 |
And I'm going to add it to the end over
here.
| | 02:04 |
This is a Height Attribute so I'll type
in the word, height followed by an equal
| | 02:09 |
sign and a quotation mark.
Within the two quotation marks, I am
| | 02:15 |
going to type in 100%.
It looks like I have an extra quotation
| | 02:19 |
mark so I need to remove that.
And now I will save the file, Cmd or Ctrl
| | 02:25 |
+ S and I'll hide Oxygen.
Let's view the results.
| | 02:30 |
I'll double-click the EPUB file to reopen
it and refresh the view.
| | 02:34 |
And as you can see, this image now
perfectly fits within the window.
| | 02:40 |
If I scale the window making it smaller,
the image will perfectly scale to adapt
| | 02:45 |
to the new size.
So, I just use the Height Attribute with
| | 02:50 |
a value of 100% because I am working with
a vertical image.
| | 02:55 |
But what about when you are working with
horizontal images, such as this one?
| | 03:01 |
I will go ahead in Export disk as an EPUB
file, I will save it to the Desktop .
| | 03:09 |
And now, I'll go ahead and edit this file
with Oxygen.
| | 03:13 |
So, within Oxygen, I'll go ahead and open
that up.
| | 03:17 |
I'll close this EPUB file by clicking
this Close button at the top of the
| | 03:20 |
Archive Browser panel.
And now, I'll open the other EPUB file up.
| | 03:28 |
And here's the image element for that
image.
| | 03:36 |
So since this image is the horizontal
image, I want to use the Width Attribute
| | 03:39 |
instead of a Height Attribute.
So, I'll typed in width followed by
| | 03:45 |
equals and then, within quotes, I'll type
in 100%.
| | 03:50 |
I'll save the file, Cmd or Ctrl + S, and
now I'll reopen it.
| | 03:59 |
And now, the width of this image will
always scale in order to fit the screen size.
| | 04:05 |
So, you might be tempted to use both the
height and the width attribute for an image.
| | 04:12 |
I'll go ahead and do that, and show you
that this is really not what you want to
| | 04:18 |
do, because what'll happen is, your image
can potentially be scaled out of proportion.
| | 04:28 |
So, I use either the Width Attribute or
the Height Attribute, but not both.
| | 04:34 |
So, that's all there is to it.
After exporting an EPUB file from
| | 04:38 |
InDesign, just open that EPUB file with
your favorite EPUB Editor, locate the
| | 04:42 |
image elements and apply the Width
Attribute or Height Attribute as needed.
| | 04:48 |
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Creating scalable SVG graphics| 00:02 |
In this lesson, I'm going to show you how
to create a fancy drop cap character that
| | 00:06 |
scales when you increase or decrease the
size of the text in an eBook.
| | 00:11 |
This is the finished version of the
eBook.
| | 00:14 |
If I increase the size of the text, the
drop cap character re-sizes as well.
| | 00:19 |
I'd also like you to notice that the drop
cap character is set in a fancy Script font.
| | 00:24 |
Now, I didn't actually embed any fonts
into this EPUB file.
| | 00:28 |
So, you might be wondering how I was able
to create this drop cap character.
| | 00:33 |
Well, it's actually a graphic.
It's not just any type of graphic, though.
| | 00:38 |
It's an SVG graphic.
SVG stands for Scalable Vector Graphics.
| | 00:44 |
Since the drop cap character is an SVG
graphic, it's resolution-independent,
| | 00:48 |
which means that it will always look good
as it's scaled up or down.
| | 00:53 |
Alright, let me demonstrate how to work
with SVG graphics in an EPUB file.
| | 00:58 |
I'll switch over to the InDesign layout.
So, the first thing that I need to do is
| | 01:03 |
convert this drop cap character to vector
outlines.
| | 01:07 |
So, with the Type tool, I'll select the
character and to convert it to outlines,
| | 01:12 |
I'm going to hold down the Option key or
the Alt key on the PC.
| | 01:18 |
And then from the Type menu, I'm going to
choose Create Outlines.
| | 01:24 |
So, this character has been converted to
vector outlines and since I held the
| | 01:28 |
Option key, the graphic was placed on top
of the actual letter.
| | 01:33 |
So now, I'm going to take note of the
width and height of this frame.
| | 01:39 |
It's about 53 points by 57 points.
So, here's what I'm going to do.
| | 01:45 |
I'm going to cut this graphic by pressing
Cmd or Ctrl + X.
| | 01:50 |
I'm going to switch over to Adobe
Illustrator, and I'll create a new document.
| | 01:56 |
So, from the File menu, I'll choose New.
And I'll make sure that the units are in
| | 02:03 |
points and I'll type in those dimensions
that I took note of a moment ago.
| | 02:08 |
That's 53x 57 points and now, I'll click
OK.
| | 02:13 |
And now that the new document has been
created, I'll go ahead and paste that
| | 02:18 |
graphic into this file, Cmd or Ctrl + V.
And now I'll just save this.
| | 02:27 |
I'll just call this Q to keep it simple.
I'll send it to the desktop and save it.
| | 02:35 |
Alright, so now, I can go back to
InDesign and import that graphic that I
| | 02:39 |
just created and I am going to replace
this letter with the graphic.
| | 02:46 |
So, with this graphic selected, I'll go
up to the File menu and choose Place.
| | 02:52 |
I'll navigate to the Desktop, select that
graphic, and I want to make sure to
| | 02:57 |
select Show Import options.
That way, when I click Open, I'm
| | 03:02 |
presented with additional options that
allow me to specify how that graphic
| | 03:06 |
should be imported.
It's important to crop the graphic to the
| | 03:11 |
bounding box and then make sure that
Transparent Background is selected just
| | 03:15 |
in case there's any transparency in the
graphic that you're working with.
| | 03:22 |
And then, I'll click OK.
So, the graphic has been imported, and
| | 03:25 |
we're looking at a low resolution preview
of that graphic, so I'm going to go to
| | 03:30 |
the View menu, choose Display
Performance, and then High Quality Display.
| | 03:36 |
That's looking much better.
So now, I'll select this character or graphic.
| | 03:41 |
It's been placed within the text flow and
the same character file that was applied
| | 03:46 |
to the letter is applied to the graphic
now.
| | 03:50 |
I'm going to unapply that.
That will allow the graphic to fit nicely
| | 03:56 |
within the text.
So, this graphic is anchored within the
| | 04:00 |
text so I can be sure that it will appear
in this exact position in the EPUB file.
| | 04:06 |
And I'll go ahead and export that EPUB
file.
| | 04:09 |
From the File menu, I'll choose Export
For, and then EPUB.
| | 04:14 |
I'll go ahead and overwrite the other
file that exists there already.
| | 04:18 |
And I want to make sure and view this
eBook after exporting it so I'll select
| | 04:22 |
this option in the Images category.
I want to make sure that Formatted is
| | 04:28 |
selected and the Image Quality is set at
High.
| | 04:33 |
In the Contents section, I want to make
sure and not include the embeddable fonts
| | 04:37 |
nor do I want to preserve the local
overwrites.
| | 04:41 |
And I can click Export.
So here's the graphic.
| | 04:46 |
And right now it appears as a raised cap,
but I want it to be a drop cap, and I
| | 04:49 |
want it to be much bigger.
So now, I can edit the EPUB file to make
| | 04:55 |
those changes.
I'm going to open this EPUB file up with
| | 04:59 |
Oxygen XML editor.
At the top of the Archive Browser panel,
| | 05:03 |
I'll click the Open Archive button.
There's my EPUB file and then within the
| | 05:09 |
OEPBS folder, I am going to open up the
XHTML file that was generated.
| | 05:16 |
Next, I need to locate the image element
that was generated for the image and here
| | 05:20 |
it is, right here.
Notice this image element contains three
| | 05:25 |
attributes, an Alt attribute, a Source
attribute, which identifies the location
| | 05:30 |
of the image, so that the eBook reader
knows where to find the image file when
| | 05:34 |
it loads the image.
It's up here in the Images folder.
| | 05:41 |
And then there's a Class attribute, which
identifies which CSS rule to use to
| | 05:46 |
format this character.
Right now it says generated style two and
| | 05:51 |
that's pretty generic.
So, I'm going to replace this with the
| | 05:55 |
word drop cap.
I'll save the file, Cmd or Ctrl + S.
| | 06:00 |
Next, I need to open up the CSS file in
order to determine the formatting for the
| | 06:05 |
drop cap.
So to do that, I need to create a new CSS rule.
| | 06:12 |
I'll add it below the two DIV elements.
And since I want to specifically select
| | 06:18 |
an image element, I need to precede the
CSS rule name with IMG followed by a
| | 06:23 |
period, and then I can type drop cap.
Alright, so this CSS rule will now be
| | 06:31 |
applied to any IMG elements that have a
Class attribute containing the word drop cap.
| | 06:38 |
Now, I can add the properties to this CSS
rule to create the formatting.
| | 06:43 |
The first one I'm going to add is float,
and I'm going to float the graphic to the left.
| | 06:49 |
This will cause the drop cap letter to
float to the left and then allow the
| | 06:53 |
other text to flow around it.
And then next, I'd like to change the
| | 06:59 |
Font Size.
So, I'll go ahead and type that in.
| | 07:02 |
I'll make it four times larger than the
text so, I'll type in 4 EM.
| | 07:10 |
For the width, I'll type in 1 EM and
then, I can go ahead and save this file.
| | 07:18 |
And let's view the results.
I'll go ahead and hide Oxygen, and I'll
| | 07:22 |
hide InDesign and Illustrator as well.
I'll double-click the EPUB file to reopen
| | 07:28 |
it and Refresh the screen.
And as you can see, the drop cap now works.
| | 07:35 |
The graphic has been lowered within the
text.
| | 07:39 |
But also notice, since this JPEG graphic
has increased in size, its edges are no
| | 07:43 |
longer crisp.
So, this is where the SVG graphic comes in.
| | 07:50 |
So, the next step I need to do is go back
to Adobe Illustrator and export this
| | 07:55 |
Illustrator file as an SVG graphic.
Now, you might be wondering why I didn't
| | 08:02 |
just place the SVG graphic into InDesign
in the first place.
| | 08:07 |
Well, first of all, InDesign doesn't
support SVG graphics, so you can't import
| | 08:11 |
them anyway.
And even if I could, the graphic would
| | 08:14 |
have been converted to a JPEG graphic
anyway when I exported the EPUB file.
| | 08:20 |
Alright, I'll go ahead and save this file
as an SVG graphic.
| | 08:26 |
I'll send it to the desktop from the
Format menu.
| | 08:30 |
You need to choose SVG, and now I'll
click Save.
| | 08:35 |
And I'm presented with additional options
and its very important that you specify
| | 08:40 |
the specific options.
So, from the SVG Profiles menu, select
| | 08:48 |
SVG 1.1 for the type.
You want to specify SVG, Subsetting, just
| | 08:54 |
leave this set to None, and you want to
keep the Embed option selected, and you
| | 08:59 |
don't want to select Preserve Illustrator
Editing Capabilities.
| | 09:06 |
So, with these options specified, I'll
click OK.
| | 09:10 |
That saves the SVG graphic.
Now, I'm going to go back to Oxygen XML
| | 09:14 |
editor and place that graphic into the
EPUB file.
| | 09:20 |
I'll go ahead and do that.
I'll flip the triangle in front of the
| | 09:23 |
Images folder.
And with the Images folder selected, I'm
| | 09:27 |
going to click the Add Files button at
the top of the Archive Browser panel.
| | 09:33 |
I'll locate that SVG graphic I just
created, and click Open.
| | 09:38 |
So, now that it's been created, there are
a couple of things that I need to do in
| | 09:41 |
order to ensure that it's used when the
eBook is opened up.
| | 09:46 |
So, the first thing I'll do is switch
back over to the XHTML file, locate the
| | 09:51 |
Image element, and for the Source
attribute, I need to change this file path.
| | 09:59 |
I no longer want to reference the JPEG
image, instead, I want to reference the
| | 10:03 |
SVG graphic.
So, that's the first thing that I need to do.
| | 10:08 |
Next, I need to make sure and add this
graphic to the manifest within the EPUB file.
| | 10:15 |
And the manifest is located within the
content.opf file.
| | 10:20 |
I'll go ahead and open it up.
This is just the regular XML document,
| | 10:24 |
but it's a little hard to read because
all the text is on one line.
| | 10:29 |
So, Oxygen has a wonderful feature right
up here.
| | 10:32 |
If you click this Format and Indent
button, Oxygen will format the XML to
| | 10:37 |
make it reader friendly.
The manifest is located right here, so
| | 10:42 |
this is the entire manifest.
This element references all the files
| | 10:48 |
that are part of the publication,
including the NCX file, all of the XTML
| | 10:53 |
Content files, the CSS Style Sheet and
any embedded image files.
| | 11:00 |
Now the actual order of these different
elements within the manifest doesn't matter.
| | 11:05 |
So, here's the item for the NCX file,
here's the item that references the XHTML
| | 11:10 |
file, here's the item that references the
JPEG image, and here's the item that
| | 11:15 |
references the CSS file.
I need to add a new item, so to make this
| | 11:22 |
easier, I'll just copy the one for the
image, Cmd or Ctrl C, I'll insert a new
| | 11:26 |
line and paste that, Cmd or Ctrl V.
Now, there are three attributes that I
| | 11:33 |
need to fill out.
For the ID, I'll just type in q.svg.
| | 11:37 |
For the HREF, which is the file path to
the actual image, I need to make sure and
| | 11:43 |
type the exact image name as it appears
within the Images folder, and that's q.svg.
| | 11:54 |
And then for the Media type, it's
important that you specify that as well.
| | 11:59 |
This is an image and it's an SVG plus an
XML file because SVG is actually based on XML.
| | 12:03 |
So, now that I've added this graphic to
the manifest within the EPUB file, I can
| | 12:11 |
save this, hide Oxygen, and let's view
the results.
| | 12:20 |
I'll reopen the EPUB file, and as you can
see, that JPEG graphic was replaced with
| | 12:25 |
the SVG graphic, and it's scalable.
But I am noticing one thing.
| | 12:32 |
I think that the graphic is a little too
close to this text.
| | 12:35 |
So, I can fix that by editing the CSS
rule.
| | 12:39 |
I'll open up the CSS file, and I'm going
to add a Margin Right Property to this
| | 12:45 |
CSS rule.
(SOUND).
| | 12:48 |
And I'll make that about 0.7 EM.
Let's see if that works.
| | 12:57 |
Now that's way too big, so I'll go back
and edit that once again.
| | 13:03 |
This time, since 7 EM is way too big,
let's make that 0.07 EM, and I'll save
| | 13:07 |
the file.
that's looking much better.
| | 13:13 |
Alright, so now, you know how to add an
SVG graphic to an eBook that can scale
| | 13:17 |
with the text as it's re-sized.
Just keep in mind that not all eBook
| | 13:23 |
readers actually support the display of
SVG graphics.
| | 13:27 |
The Kindle supports them, the iPad does
as well.
| | 13:31 |
But in my testing with the iPad, the
actual character doesn't re-size along
| | 13:34 |
with the rest of the text.
However, scalable SVG graphics are
| | 13:39 |
definitely supported by Adobe Digital
Editions, and any other Adobe supported
| | 13:43 |
eBook reading devices, such as the Sony
Reader.
| | 13:48 |
| | Collapse this transcript |
|
|
8. Final StepValidating an EPUB file| 00:02 |
After you've created an EPUB file and
you've made any necessary modifications
| | 00:06 |
to it.
The last important step in the ebook
| | 00:09 |
production workflow is to validate the
EPUB file.
| | 00:12 |
This way you're sure that its error free
and fully compliant with the EPUB specifications.
| | 00:18 |
Threepress Consulting provides an
excellent web based service that allows
| | 00:22 |
you to easily validate an EPUB file.
To use the validation tool go to
| | 00:28 |
threepress.org and then click on this
tools link.
| | 00:32 |
The EPUB validator is located over here
on the left side.
| | 00:37 |
This validator uses two services,
EPUBCheck and EPUBPreflight.
| | 00:43 |
EPUB Check can detect many types of
errors in an EPUB file.
| | 00:47 |
It checks the structure of an EPUB file,
and it examines the XML markup to make
| | 00:51 |
sure that it's well formed and compliant
with the EPUB specifications.
| | 00:56 |
EPUB Preflight runs some of the same
validation as EPUBCheck, but it checks
| | 01:01 |
for other problems as well.
Such as extra large file sizes that can
| | 01:05 |
effect some ebook readers.
I'll go ahead and upload an EPUB file, to
| | 01:10 |
check if it's valid or not.
I'll click here, choose File, and then
| | 01:14 |
I'll locate the EPUB file that I want to
validate.
| | 01:18 |
And click Choose.
Now I'll click the Validate button, so it
| | 01:22 |
takes just a few minutes to validate, and
here are the results.
| | 01:27 |
As you can see by this logo here, this
EPUB file is not valid.
| | 01:32 |
It produced one error, and the error
message tells me that the date value is
| | 01:36 |
not a valid value.
So, to fix this, I need to edit the EPUB file.
| | 01:43 |
I'll switch over to Oxygen and open up
this EPUB file.
| | 01:48 |
So at the top of the Archive Browser
window, I'll click the Open Archive
| | 01:51 |
button and I'll open up this EPUB file.
The date element is located in the
| | 01:58 |
metadata section of the content.opf file.
The content.opf file is located here in
| | 02:05 |
the OEBPS folder.
Here it is, I'll go ahead and open it up.
| | 02:11 |
So, here's the date element.
Notice that it's empty.
| | 02:16 |
In fact, InDesign exports all EPUB files
with an empty date element.
| | 02:21 |
So, no EPUB files generated by InDesign
will actually pass this validation test,
| | 02:25 |
until you either enter a date or delete
the date element all together.
| | 02:32 |
I'll go ahead and enter a date.
I'll delete this forward slash, and then
| | 02:36 |
Oxygen adds the necessary end tag to this
element, so all I need to do is fill in
| | 02:40 |
the date.
A four digit year is required, so I'll
| | 02:45 |
type in 2010 followed by a hyphen.
And then an optional two digit month,
| | 02:51 |
followed by an optional two digit day.
So if you include the month, you also
| | 02:57 |
need to include the day.
And also make sure that you use hyphens.
| | 03:03 |
Alright, I'll go ahead and save this file
by pressing Cmd or Ctrl+S.
| | 03:09 |
And I'll revalidate it.
I'll switch back over to the website.
| | 03:20 |
And now this EPUB file is valid.
It's always nice when you see the big
| | 03:24 |
green check mark.
I'm going to click the Back button, to go
| | 03:28 |
back to the previous web page because I'd
like you to notice that when an EPUB file
| | 03:32 |
does not pass validation.
You'll get a list of common errors over
| | 03:37 |
here at the right side of the web page.
Now since you're using InDesign to
| | 03:42 |
generate you EPUB files, you won't run
into most of these errors.
| | 03:46 |
However the one up here at the top, is
one that you can potentially run into.
| | 03:51 |
It states that the attribute compression
is not allowed.
| | 03:56 |
You'll commonly run into this error when
you try to validate an EPUB file that has
| | 04:00 |
embedded fonts, and was exported from
InDesign CS4.
| | 04:04 |
Let me demonstrate that.
I'll go ahead and choose this other file,
| | 04:10 |
this one here with the embedded fonts
that was generated with InDesign CS4.
| | 04:14 |
Let's validate it.
So here's that error message.
| | 04:21 |
It's telling me that the attribute
compression is not allowed.
| | 04:27 |
Let me show you where that's found.
I'll switch back over to Oxygen, and I'll
| | 04:31 |
open that EPUB file up.
I'll close this one, so the error message
| | 04:36 |
is being produced because within this
encryption.xml file.
| | 04:44 |
Right up here, inside of this first
element, is an attribute, a compression attribute.
| | 04:50 |
Now I've discovered that if I delete this
attribute, the embedded fonts are still
| | 04:54 |
displayed correctly in an ebook reader,
and the EPUB file passes the validation test.
| | 05:01 |
So with that deleted, I'll just go ahead
and save the file.
| | 05:04 |
I'll switch back over to that website.
And now I'll re-validate this file.
| | 05:15 |
And now its valid.
The good news is that InDesign CS5
| | 05:18 |
doesn't generate the compression
attribute when it creates the
| | 05:21 |
encryption.xml file.
So when you embed fonts into an EPUB file
| | 05:26 |
using InDesign CS5, it will pass the
validation test.
| | 05:31 |
I'll go ahead and test the same ebook
that was created with InDesign CS5.
| | 05:34 |
And it's valid as well.
All right, let me point out another
| | 05:37 |
common error that you can potentially run
into.
| | 05:39 |
Particularly if your manually unarchiving
and rearchiving the EPUB file, instead of
| | 05:43 |
using an XML editor like Oxygen.
Alright, I'll go ahead and choose that
| | 05:57 |
file, and validate it.
And it definately didn't pass, because of
| | 06:02 |
two errors, both of these errors are
related to the same thing.
| | 06:06 |
Here it's telling me that the length of
the first file name in that archive must
| | 06:10 |
be eight but was 26.
That really doesn't tell me much.
| | 06:14 |
But this one here does give me a hint.
The required meta infcontainer.xml
| | 06:19 |
resource is missing.
Now, these aren't explicitly telling me
| | 06:23 |
what the problem is, but let me show you
what that problem is and how it was created.
| | 06:29 |
I'm going to go to my desktop where I
have a sample ebook.
| | 06:33 |
So, in order to generate that file,
here's what you'll have to do.
| | 06:37 |
So, knowing that a EPUB file is really a
zip file.
| | 06:41 |
It is possible to change the file
extension to .zip, unarchive the file.
| | 06:47 |
Make changes to the contents of the file,
and then rearchive it.
| | 06:52 |
But you have to re-archive it using the
command line, because the mine type file
| | 06:58 |
within the package cannot be compressed.
And if you just simply re-archive the
| | 07:05 |
file after unarchiving it, you're going
to compress that mine type file.
| | 07:10 |
And that is what produces the error that
I just ran into.
| | 07:14 |
If I scroll down a little bit.
And look at this preflight report.
| | 07:18 |
This error message tells me that the mind
type entry is missing.
| | 07:21 |
Or it's not the first file in the
archive.
| | 07:25 |
So this error message gives me a lot more
information.
| | 07:29 |
So as you can see, this validation server
provided by Threepress Consulting is a
| | 07:33 |
very useful tool.
Now if you like, you can also run
| | 07:37 |
EpubCheck as a stand alone command line
tool on your own computer.
| | 07:43 |
To download this tool visit
code.google.com/p/epubcheck.
| | 07:55 |
Over here on the right side of the web
page, you can find the downloads and you
| | 07:59 |
can also download the EPUBPreflight tool
from this web page as well.
| | 08:05 |
Alright so now you know how to validate
an e pub file to make sure that its error
| | 08:10 |
free and completely compliant with the e
pub specifications
| | 08:16 |
| | Collapse this transcript |
|
|
